GIMP User Manual

The GIMP Documentation Team

2000, 2001
 1

Legal Notice
Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.1 or
any later version published by the Free Software Foundation with no Invariant
Sections, no Front-Cover Texts, and no Back-Cover Texts. You may obtain
a copy of the GNU Free Documentation License from the Free Software
Foundation by visiting theirWeb site or by writing to: Free Software
Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307,
USA.
Many of the names used by companies to distinguish their products
and services are claimed as trademarks. Where those names appear in
any GIMP documentation, and those trademarks are made aware to the members
of the GIMP Documentation Project, the names have been printed in capitals
or initial capitals.
 Contents

1 Introduction 14
1.1 What is The GIMP? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
1.1.1 A Brief List of Features and Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
1.1.2 Platform Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
1.1.3 About the Help System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
1.2 What Can GIMP Do For Me? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
1.2.1 Image Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
1.2.2 Video Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
1.3 Bug Submission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
1.3.1 How to collect the information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
1.3.2 Where to submit your bug report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

2 Using GIMP 18
2.1 Starting for the First Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
2.1.1 User Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
2.1.2 Performance Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
2.1.3 Monitor Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
2.2 The Main Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
2.2.1 The ToolBox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
2.2.2 The Image Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
2.3 File Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
2.3.1 Supported Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
2.3.2 What Format Should I Use? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

3 ToolBox 24
3.1 Toolbox Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
3.2 The ToolBox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
3.3 Module Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
3.4 Help Page for Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
3.5 Context Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
3.6 Tip of the Day . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
3.7 About Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

4 Image 26
4.1 Image Menu Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
4.2 The Image Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
4.3 Image history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
4.3.1 Undo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
4.3.2 Redo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
4.4 Clipboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
4.4.1 Cut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
4.4.2 Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
4.4.3 Paste . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
CONTENTS 3

4.4.4 Paste Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

4.4.5 Paste As New . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
4.4.6 Cut Named . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
4.4.7 Copy Named . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
4.4.8 Paste Named . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
4.5 Operations with selections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
4.5.1 Clear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
4.5.2 Fill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
4.5.3 Stroke . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
4.6 Selection operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
4.6.1 Invert Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
4.6.2 Select All . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
4.6.3 Select None . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
4.6.4 Float Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
4.6.5 Feather Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
4.6.6 Sharpen Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
4.6.7 Shrink Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
4.6.8 Grow Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
4.6.9 Border Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
4.6.10 Save Selection to Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
4.7 Customizing the view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
4.7.1 Zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
4.7.2 Dot for Dot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
4.7.3 The Info Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
4.7.4 The Navigation Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
4.7.5 Toggle Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
4.7.6 Toggle Rulers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
4.7.7 Toggle Statusbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
4.7.8 Toggle Guides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
4.7.9 Snap to Guides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
4.7.10 New View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
4.7.11 Shrink Wrap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
4.8 Changing the imagetype . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
4.8.1 Convert to RGB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
4.8.2 Convert to Grayscale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
4.8.3 Convert to Indexed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
4.9 Image operations with lookuptables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
4.9.1 Desaturate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
4.9.2 Invert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
4.9.3 Equalize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
4.10 Canvas operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
4.10.1 Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
4.10.2 Set Canvas Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
4.10.3 Scale Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
4.10.4 Scale Layer Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
4.10.5 Duplicate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

5 Layers 39
CONTENTS 4

5.1 What are Layers? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

5.2 Using Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
5.3 The Layers Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
5.4 New Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
5.5 Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
5.6 Duplicate Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
5.7 Anchor Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
5.8 Delete Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
5.9 Layer Boundary Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
5.9.1 The Chain Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
5.10 Layer to Image Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
5.11 Scale Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
5.12 Merge Visible Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
5.12.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
5.13 Merge Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
5.14 Flatten Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
5.15 Add Layer Mask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
5.16 Apply Layer Mask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
5.17 Delete Layer Mask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
5.18 Layer Mask to Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
5.19 Add Alpha Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
5.20 Alpha to Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
5.21 Edit Layer Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
5.21.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

6 Channels 47
6.1 Channels Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
6.2 The Channels Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
6.2.1 Selections and Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
6.3 The New Channel Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
6.4 Raise Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
6.5 Lower Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
6.6 Duplicate Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
6.7 Channel to Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
6.8 Delete Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
6.9 Edit Channel Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

7 Paths 50
7.1 Paths Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
7.2 The Paths Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
7.2.1 Control area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
7.2.2 Edit area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
7.2.3 Path area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
7.3 New Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
7.4 Duplicate Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
7.5 Path to Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
7.6 Stroke Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
7.7 Delete Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
CONTENTS 5

7.8 Copy Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

7.9 Paste Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
7.10 Export Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
7.11 Import Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
7.12 Edit Path Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

8 Tools 55
8.1 Tools Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
8.2 Tool Options Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
8.3 Airbrush . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
8.3.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
8.3.2 Airbrush Tool Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
8.4 Bezier Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
8.4.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
8.4.2 Bezier Selection Tool Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
8.5 Blend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
8.5.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
8.5.2 Blend Tool Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
8.6 Brightness-Contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
8.6.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
8.6.2 Brightness - Contrast Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
8.7 Bucket Fill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
8.7.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
8.7.2 Bucket Fill Tool Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
8.8 By Color Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
8.8.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
8.8.2 Select by Color Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
8.9 Clone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
8.9.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
8.9.2 Clone Tool Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
8.10 Color Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
8.10.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
8.10.2 Color Balance Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
8.11 Color Picker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
8.11.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
8.11.2 Color Picker Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
8.12 Convolver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
8.12.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
8.12.2 Convolver Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
8.13 Crop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
8.13.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
8.13.2 Crop Tool Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
8.13.3 Crop and Resize Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
8.14 Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
8.14.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
8.14.2 Curves Tool Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
8.15 Dodge or Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
8.15.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
CONTENTS 6

8.15.2 Dodge / Burn Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

8.16 Elliptical Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
8.16.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
8.16.2 Elliptical Selection Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
8.17 Eraser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
8.17.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
8.17.2 Eraser Tool Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
8.18 Flip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
8.18.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
8.18.2 Flip Tool Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
8.19 Free-Hand Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
8.19.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
8.19.2 Free-Hand Selection Tool Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
8.20 Fuzzy Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
8.20.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
8.20.2 Fuzzy Selection Tool Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
8.21 Histogram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
8.21.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
8.21.2 Histogram Tools Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
8.22 Hue-Saturation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
8.22.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
8.22.2 Hue-Saturation Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
8.23 Ink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
8.23.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
8.23.2 Ink Tool Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
8.24 Intelligent Scissors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
8.24.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
8.24.2 Intelligent Scissors Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
8.25 Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
8.25.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
8.25.2 Levels Tool Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
8.26 Magnify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
8.26.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
8.26.2 Magnify Tool Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
8.27 Measure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
8.27.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
8.27.2 Measure Tool Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
8.28 Move . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
8.28.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
8.29 Paintbrush . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
8.29.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
8.29.2 Paintbrush Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
8.30 Pencil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
8.30.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
8.30.2 Pencil Tool Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
8.31 Posterize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
8.31.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
8.31.2 Posterize Tool Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
CONTENTS 7

8.32 Rectangular Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

8.32.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
8.32.2 Rectangular Selection Tool Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
8.33 Smudge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
8.33.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
8.33.2 Smudge Tool Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
8.34 Text Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
8.34.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
8.34.2 Text Tool Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
8.35 Threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
8.35.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
8.35.2 Threshold Tool Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
8.36 Transform Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
8.36.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
8.36.2 Transform Tool Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
8.36.3 Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
8.36.4 Scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
8.36.5 Shearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
8.36.6 Perspective . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

9 File 83
9.1 File Operations Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
9.2 New Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
9.3 Open File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
9.4 File Save or Save As . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
9.5 Revert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
9.6 Last Opened . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
9.7 Close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
9.8 Quit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
9.9 Really Close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
9.10 Really Quit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

10 Open 87
10.1 Opening Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
10.2 Open by Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

11 Save 88
11.1 Saving Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
11.2 Save by Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

12 Dialogs 89
12.1 Dialogs Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
12.2 Layers, Channels and Paths Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
12.3 The Preferences Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
12.4 New File Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
12.4.1 Default Image Size and Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
12.4.2 Default Image Resolution and Resolution Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
12.4.3 Default Image Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
12.4.4 Maximum Image Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
CONTENTS 8

12.4.5 Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
12.4.6 Default Comment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
12.5 Display Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
12.5.1 Transparency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
12.5.2 8-Bit Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
12.6 Interface Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
12.6.1 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
12.6.2 Help System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
12.6.3 Image Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
12.6.4 Tool Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
12.7 Environment Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
12.7.1 Resource Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
12.7.2 Scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
12.7.3 File Saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
12.8 Session Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
12.8.1 Window Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
12.8.2 Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
12.9 Monitor Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
12.9.1 Get Monitor Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
12.10 Directories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
12.11 The Brush Selection Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
12.11.1 Preview and Brush Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
12.11.2 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
12.11.3 Pixmap Brushes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
12.12 The Brush Editor Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
12.12.1 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
12.13 The Gradient Selection Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
12.14 Gradient Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
12.14.1 The Popup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
12.15 Copy Gradient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
12.16 Delete Gradient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
12.17 New Gradient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
12.18 Rename Gradient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
12.19 Replicate Segment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
12.20 Save as PovRay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
12.21 Split Segments Uniformly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
12.22 The Pattern Selection Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
12.23 The Color Palette Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
12.24 The Palette Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
12.24.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
12.25 Delete Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
12.26 Import Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
12.26.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
12.27 Merge Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
12.28 New Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
12.29 Indexed Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
12.30 Input Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
12.31 The Device Status Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
CONTENTS 9

12.32 The Document Index Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

12.33 The Error Console Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
12.34 Undo History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
12.35 The Standard GIMP Color Selector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
12.36 The GTK Color Selector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
12.37 The Triangle Color Selector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
12.38 The Watercolor Color Selector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
12.39 Edit Qmask Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

13 Filters 107
13.1 Filters Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
13.2 Reshow Last Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
13.3 Repeat Last Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
13.4 2x2 Contrast Enhance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
13.5 Add Dust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
13.6 Adjust FG-BG / Color Range Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
13.7 Alien Map 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
13.8 Alien Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
13.9 Align Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
13.10 Animate Cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
13.11 Animation Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
13.12 Animation Optimize / Unoptimize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
13.13 Apply Lens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
13.14 Apply Canvas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
13.15 Auto Crop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
13.16 Autostretch HSV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
13.17 Blended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
13.18 Blinds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
13.19 Blow in/out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
13.20 Blur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
13.21 Border Average . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
13.22 Bumpmap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
13.23 Burst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
13.24 BZ2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
13.25 Stretch Contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
13.26 Center Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
13.27 Checkerboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
13.28 CML Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
13.29 Color Enhance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
13.30 Color Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
13.31 Colorify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
13.32 Color to Alpha . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
13.33 Compose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
13.34 Convolution Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
13.35 Cubism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
13.36 Curve Bend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
13.37 Decompose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
13.38 Deinterlace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
CONTENTS 10

13.39 Depth Merge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

13.40 Despeckle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
13.41 Destripe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
13.42 Diffraction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
13.43 Displace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
13.44 Ditherize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
13.45 Edge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
13.46 Emboss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
13.47 Engrave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
13.48 Fade Alpha . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
13.49 Film . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
13.50 Fire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
13.51 FITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
13.52 Fit Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
13.53 Flame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
13.54 FlareFX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
13.55 Filter Pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
13.56 Fractal Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
13.57 Fractal Trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
13.58 Frame Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
13.59 Frame Reshuffle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
13.60 Gaussian Blur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
13.61 RLE Gaussian Blur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
13.62 Dynamic Text Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
13.63 GeeZoom! . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
13.64 Gfig . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
13.65 GFlare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
13.66 GIH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
13.67 Gimpressionist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
13.68 Glass Tile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
13.69 Glowing Steel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
13.69.1 Add Glow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
13.69.2 Brushed Metal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
13.69.3 Highlight Edges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
13.70 Gradient Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
13.71 Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
13.72 GIMP Table Magic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
13.73 Remove Guides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
13.74 Guides to Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
13.75 Guide Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
13.76 Guillotine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
13.77 GZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
13.78 Hot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
13.79 HRZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
13.80 IFS Compose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
13.81 Illusion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
13.82 Image Tile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
13.83 Imagemap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
CONTENTS 11

13.84 iWarp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

13.85 Jigsaw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
13.86 JPEG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
13.87 Laplace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
13.88 Layer Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
13.89 Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
13.90 Logulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
13.91 Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
13.92 Map to Gradient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
13.93 Map Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
13.94 Max RGB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
13.95 Maze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
13.96 Motion Blur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
13.97 MIFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
13.98 Mirror Split . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
13.99 Mosaic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
13.100 Newsprint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
13.101 NL Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
13.102 Noisify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
13.103 Not yet written . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
13.104 Normalize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
13.105 Super Nova . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
13.106 Oilify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
13.107 Pagecurl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
13.108 Papertile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
13.109 PAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
13.110 Perlotine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
13.111 Pixelize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
13.112 Pixelmap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
13.113 Plasma . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
13.114 PNG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
13.115 PNM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
13.116 Polarize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
13.117 Prepare for GIF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
13.118 The Print Plug-In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
13.119 PSP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
13.120 Qbist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
13.121 Random Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
13.122 Randomize (Hurl, Pick, Slur) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
13.123 Rotate Color Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
13.124 Repeat and Duplicate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
13.125 Resynthesize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
13.126 Ripple . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
13.127 Rotate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
13.128 Round Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
13.129 Sample Colorize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
13.130 Scatter HSV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
13.131 Scratches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
CONTENTS 12

13.132 Selective Gaussian Blur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

13.133 Selection to Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
13.134 Semi-Flatten . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
13.135 SGI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
13.136 Sharpen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
13.137 Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
13.138 Sinus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
13.139 Smooth Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
13.140 Sobel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
13.141 Solid Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
13.142 Sparkle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
13.143 Spread . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
13.144 Stampify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
13.145 Apply Canvas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
13.146 Sunras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
13.147 Terral Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
13.148 TeX String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
13.149 TGA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
13.150 Threshold Alpha . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
13.151 TIFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
13.152 Tile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
13.153 Tileable Blur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
13.154 Small Tiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
13.155 Make Seamless . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
13.156 Transparent Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
13.157 Unsharp Mask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
13.158 URL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
13.159 Van Gogh (LIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
13.160 Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
13.161 Value Invert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
13.162 Value Propagate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
13.163 Warp Sharp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
13.164 Warp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
13.165 Waves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
13.166 Webify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
13.167 Whirl Pinch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
13.168 Wind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
13.169 Windify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
13.170 WMF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
13.171 Xach Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
13.172 Xach Shadows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
13.173 Xachvision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
13.174 XWD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
13.175 Zealous Crop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
13.176 (GAP) Animation Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
13.177 (GAP) Video Frontends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
13.178 (GAP) Video Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
13.179 (GAP) Video Plugins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
CONTENTS 13

14 Keyboard Shortcuts 171

15 Command Line Options 175

15.1 GIMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
15.2 GIMP Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
15.3 GIMP Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

16 GIMP License 179

17 Glossary 187
CHAPTER1

Introduction

1.1 What is The GIMP?

Introduction The GIMP is an acronym for GNU Image Manipulation Program. The
GIMP is an application suitable for such tasks as retouching of photographs, compos-
ing and authoring images. Its capabilities as an image manipulation program make it
a worthy competitor to other similar programs such as Adobe P HOTOSHOP or Corel
P HOTO PAINT.
The biggest advantage of The GIMP is it’s free availability (e.g. from the Internet,
packaged with various Linux distributions, etc). Even more importantly, it’s not freeware.
The GIMP is an OSS (Open Source Software) program covered by the GPL license,
which gives you the freedom to access and also to change the source code that makes
up the program.
This is how and why GIMP is constantly being developed and improved, not only by
it’s core developers, but by a large amount of contributers and users.

1.1.1 A Brief List of Features and Capabilities

• Full suite of painting tools including brushes, a pencil, an airbrush, an ink tool,
and cloning.

• Tile-based memory management so image size is limited only by available disk

space.

• Sub-pixel sampling for all paint tools, allowing for high-quality anti-aliasing.

• Full Alpha channel (transparency) support.

• Layers and channels.

• Advanced scripting capabilities provided by a procedural database so you can

call internal GIMP functions from external scripts, such as Script-Fu, Perl-Fu
(Perl scripts) and Python-Fu (Python scripts).

• Multiple undo and redo, limited only by disk space.

• Transformation tools including rotate, scale, shear, and flip.

14
CHAPTER 1. INTRODUCTION 15

• File formats supported include PostScript, JPEG, GIF, PNG, XPM, TIFF, TGA,
MPEG, PCX, BMP and many others.

• Selection tools including rectangular, elliptical, free, fuzzy, paths, and intelligent
scissors.

• Plug-ins that allow for the easy addition of new functions, new file formats, and
new effects filters.

1.1.2 Platform Support

The GIMP is probably most known for its use on the GNU/Linux platform, but there
are many platforms that GIMP can run on. GIMP is known to work on GNU/L INUX,
M ICROSOFT W INDOWS 95, 98, NT4 AND 2000, O PEN BSD, N ET BSD, F REE BSD, S O -
LARIS , S UN OS, AIX, HP-UX, T RU 64, D IGITAL U NIX , OSF/1, IRIX, OS/2 and B E OS.
Porting GIMP to other platforms is possible only due to source code availability.

1.1.3 About the Help System

The GIMP help system will provide you with the necessary information on how to use
all the functions GIMP provides. It will do so in a short effective way best described
as an extended quick reference. The difference between the GIMP help system and a
pure quick reference is that the help system will describe how to use the functions in a
productive manner as well as their functionality. How to Use the Help System
The built-in GIMP help browser has three notebook tabs: the one that help pages
are displayed in, the contents tab showing a structured list of help items, and the index
which shows an list of all chapters and keywords in the help system. The advantage of
the built-in help browser is that you can easily navigate the help system and display the
help text in the main tab. However, if you prefer, you can use choose N ETSCAPE N AV-
IGATOR in thePreferences Dialog from which you can also access all parts of the help
system. If you are using GIMP in M ICROSOFT W INDOWS, your default Internet browser
will be used which is usually either Netscape N AVIGATOR or Microsoft I NTERNET E X -
PLORER . What to Expect of the Help System
Besides the description of the functionality of the functions in The GIMP, you will
also find descriptions of how to organize your work with GIMP, how to configure it,
various tips and tricks, a quick reference page of short cuts and modifier keys, and
much more.

1.2 What Can GIMP Do For Me?

The GIMP is a very powerful application which has many uses.

1.2.1 Image Editing

GIMP’s main use is for the creation and editing of bitmap images. This ranges from the
touching up of digital photographs to the creation of digital art or the authoring of logos.
The word “bitmap” means that GIMP is mainly designed to work on images that are
CHAPTER 1. INTRODUCTION 16

made up of “pixels” – tiny rectangles1 which each have a single set color. These pixels
are colored in a way to make up images.
The other common method of handling images is in “vectors”. A vector image is
made up of primitives such as lines, curves, circles, rectangles and fills. GIMP has
some support for vector drawing in the G FIG plug-in, but it is not a complete editing
environment and shouldn’t be used for the creation of complex vector diagrams.

1.2.2 Video Editing

GIMP also offers some image editing features, which are mainly useful for creating
small animations since the editing is done on a frame-by-frame basis. GIMP supports
writing the AVI and GIF animation formats and can also read MPEG videos.

1.3 Bug Submission

Bug submission is an important aspect of many Open Source projects, and submitting
bugs correctly increases the chances of the core development team finding and fixing
any problems that may arise. Of important note is the realization that it may not be the
GIMP causing your particular problem, thus, one can understand the need for clear,
concise, and accurate submissions to the GIMP developers.

1.3.1 How to collect the information

As outlined, it is preferred if you can supply a certain level of system information in
your bug submissions. You may well be wondering what, or indeed how, to get this all
important information.
The first piece of information that is important is the version of GIMP that you are
running. This can be found by clicking Help About. As you can imagine, if the problem
you are submitting has already been fixed in a more current version of the GIMP than
what you are using – the solution will be very straight forward. It is also helpful to know
where your copy of the GIMP originated from. Was it included with your distribution?
Did you copy it off a magazine CD? Did you download the .rpms or the .debs? This will
help locate problems caused by external influences, such as incorrect library versions.
Of equal importance is the version of GTK currently in use on your system. The easiest
way to find this information is to start a terminal window (Xterm, Eterm, konsole, etc),
and run gtk-config -version. This will output your GTK version to the terminal.
Another number that might help is your XF REE 86 version. This can be a little more
difficult to find out. If you use a Linux distribution that uses a package management
system such as RedHat, Mandrake, Debian, CorelLinux, or one of the many others,
you will find the package tools invaluable in discovering application version numbers.
XF REE 86 is the windowing system that allows W INDOW M ANAGERS to display such
things as windows, title bars, docks, panels, and all the other prettiness you may see on
your screen. If you are using W INDOWS, this does not apply.
If you have a problem related to windowing (such as dialogs not showing, or the
GIMP suddenly disappearing without apparent error) or display-oriented strangeness,
1
In a correct view pixels are defined to be the intersection of two drawn lines however it is easier to imagine
them as little dots or rectangles.
CHAPTER 1. INTRODUCTION 17

it would be helpful to know which window manager you are using. Another question that
could be asked is whether GNOME or KDE (if either) is being used.
Another useful tidbit of information that is valuable for diagnosis is stating exactly
what it is that has caused the problem. Simply saying, “The foo plug-in doesn’t work.”
is not very helpful. Try to be as explicit as possible, “When I clicked ’foo-button’ in the
’bar-plugin’ GIMP told me that such and such didn’t work.”. If the developers don’t know
exactly which part of the GIMP caused the error, or problem you are referring to, they
can’t really help you.
Now that you have gathered all of the information needed for an accurate bug sub-
mission, let’s move on to actually submitting the report.

1.3.2 Where to submit your bug report

There is only one good way submit your report. The The GNOME Bug Tracker. You will
have to set up a user account and then will be able to submit your report. It is vital that
the information provided is accurate.
Now that you’ve submitted a bug report that’s concise, insightful, and just a little
daring, what now? It would be unreasonable to expect the developers to respond to
every report in person, but know that your report has been noted, and, if it can be
reproduced, it will be fixed. Bugs that are not actual bugs (problems that are not related
to code) should be answered for you if someone else can reproduce it, or has had the
same problem before.
CHAPTER2

Using GIMP

2.1 Starting for the First Time

When you launch T HE GIMP for the first time, you will see a special dialog box. This
allows you to setup T HE GIMP to your personal settings, without affecting the way T HE
GIMP runs for other users. The first thing you’ll see is the license to T HE GIMP – the
GNU General Public License. Click continue if you accept the license.

2.1.1 User Directory

T HE GIMP now needs to create a directory to hold your personal settings. Under UNIX,
Linux, and UNIX-like systems, the directory will be ˜/.gimp-1.2, the tilde represents
your home directory – often /home/username. Under M ICROSOFT W INDOWS the di-
rectory location will vary. All the files and directories which will be created are listed on
the left-hand side. Click on any of the entries to see what it is for. If you want these files
and directories to be created, click Continue. T HE GIMP will give you a list of what was
done. You should check this list for any errors and if there are no problems you may
click Continue again.

2.1.2 Performance Tuning

To make T HE GIMP perform as well as possible, you can adjust several settings. For
storing data about images which are being edited, T HE GIMP uses a section of memory
called the Tile Cache. A good way to decide on a good size for your Tile Cache is to
use two-thirds of the RAM available in your system. For example, 32 MB would be a
good size if your system has 48 MB RAM.
Some images are just too big to fit into this cache, and so T HE GIMP can use your
hard disk as a type of additional memory. You should set your swap directory to an
area on your hard disk which has enough free space – around 200 MB. To enhance
performance when you have several hard disks, you can set the swap file to the fastest
one. To locate a directory, click on the ... button or enter it directly into the box. You
should make sure that T HE GIMP shows you a checkmark next to the box, otherwise
T HE GIMP can’t access the directory.
Once you have made your settings, click Continue.

18
CHAPTER 2. USING GIMP 19

 

You can change these settings later in T HE GIMP’s Preferences Dialog.

 

2.1.3 Monitor Resolution

Every monitor is slightly different, and, to make images look correct, T HE GIMP needs
to know the resolution of your monitor. You may find information on your monitor’s
resolution in its manual. If you are not sure, click Calibrate. You need to then find
a ruler and measure the length of the white bars. Enter their measurements in the
horizontal and v ertical boxes. You can select the units used for measuring the bars
from the drop-down list. Click OK when you have finished calibrating.
When you are ready, click Continue to finish the configuration and start T HE GIMP.
T HE GIMP will show a splash-screen with a progress-bar at the bottom showing what
T HE GIMP is doing. When T HE GIMP starts, it looks through all your personal direc-
tories for items such as plug-ins and patterns. The first time T HE GIMP starts, this
process will take much longer than future times because T HE GIMP creates a cache of
the files.

2.2 The Main Interface

When you first see GIMP’s interface, you may think it looks very strange because it
consists of several windows and provides lots of r ight-click menus to access much of
GIMP’s power.
The GIMP interface has two main windows – theToolbox and theImage Window
as well as a myriad of other windows such as theColor Palette Selection or theLayers
Dialog, etc.

2.2.1 The ToolBox

See:ToolBox Help.

2.2.2 The Image Window

The other window which you will need to use all the time is theImage Window. This is
where your drawing space is, and it also contains several additional features and the
menu from which most of GIMP’s functions can be accessed.
CHAPTER 2. USING GIMP 20

The Image Window

20 shows the Image Window created by the default settings. When you first start,
no image window will be open because no images are open. To create a new image,
click New... from the File menu.
The white section of 20 is the area in which you create your image. The image
above is 256 x 256 pixels. If your image is larger, you may need to use the scrollbars at
the right and bottom of the image area to view the whole image. At the top and left of
the image there are rulers which allow you to see where the cursor is. Your location is
also shown as coordinates in the bottom left corner.
Probably the most important feature of the Image Window is theImage Menu This
menu can be accessed either by left-clicking the arrow at top left corner, or by r ight-
clicking anywhere in the drawing area. A menu will pop-up with various entries on it. If
you don’t want to keep clicking to bring up this (or any other) menu, you can click the
dotted line at the top of the menu to activate the tear-off feature and it will gain its
own window which you can leave open while you work.
The Image Menu

2.3 File Formats

The GIMP has support for a wide range of still image and video file formats.
CHAPTER 2. USING GIMP 21

2.3.1 Supported Formats

The following table lists the formats supported by GIMP:

File Formats
Read Write
AA - ASCII Art N Y
AVI - Audio/Video Interleave Y Y
BMP - Bitmap Y Y
C - "C" Source N Y
CEL - CIMFast Event Language Y Y
FITS - Flexible Image Transport System Y Y
FLI - Autodesk FLIC Animation Y Y
GIF - Graphics Interchange Formata Y Y
H - "C" Header File N Y
HRZ - Slow Scan Television Y Y
HTML - Formatted Table N Y
JPEG - Joint Photographics Expert Group Y Y
MIFF - Magick Image File Format Y Y
MPEG - Motion Picture Expert Group Y N
PCX - PC Paintbrush Y Y
PIX - Inset Systems Bitmap Y Y
PNG - Portable Network Graphics Y Y
PNM - Portable Anymap Y Y
PSD - Photoshop Document Y N
PSP - Paint Shop Pro Y N
PS - PostScript Y Y
SGI - Silicon Graphics Y Y
Sunras - Sun Raster Y Y
TGA - Targa Bitmap Y Y
TIFF - Tagged Image File Format Y Y
WMF - Windows Meta File Y N
XBM - X Bitmap Y Y
XCF - GIMP Native Y Y
XWD - X Window Dump Y Y
XPM - X Pixmap Y Y
a
You need a license from Unisys to legally save files in this format.

2.3.2 What Format Should I Use?

When saving a file, you need to decide which file format to use. There are descriptions
of some important and popular formats below to help you choose the right one for your
images.

XCF: GIMP’s Native Format If you’re saving an image that’s not “finished” and intend
to continue working on the image in GIMP later, you should always save it as
XCF. XCF preserves all of your image’s layers, channels, and masks, as well as
your paths, guides, selections, and other important details.
CHAPTER 2. USING GIMP 22

However, XCF is only suitable for GIMP. If you want to share your image or put
the image on the web, you should probably use another file formatas well as
XCF because most web browsers, image viewers, and other software packages
cannot read XCF.
See also: XCF Glossary entry

PNG: Portable Network Graphics PNG can preserve all the transparency and color
of your original image and uses powerful lossless compression to reduce file
sizes. In particular, computer-generated images usually compress very well.
Although PNG supports smooth transparency, today’s most popular web browsers
still don’t. While we wait for Microsoft to catch up, you’ll probably want to stick with
non-transparent PNG files on web pages. You can use transparency effectively
elsewhere though.

JPEG: Joint Picture Expert Group Photographs and other images from the real world
(which include most images taken with digital cameras and color scans) can be
compressed very effectively with JPEG. Usually screenshots, logos, and com-
puter generated images will not benefit from JPEG.
The JPEG method is lossy, which means that, although the saved image will
appear almost identical to the original, it will actually have hidden detail removed.
You should not use it on images that you intend to do additional processing on
later because the loss is exaggerated by repeated use.
The JPEG filter used by T HE GIMP utilizes JFIF compression for compatibility
with most existing software. It allows you to adjust the quality of the image and
see immediately how the saved image will look and how big the file will be.

GIF: Graphics Interchange Format Unlike all the other file formats described here
GIF requires the use of a colormap. This means that a maximum of 256 different
colors will be preserved in the saved image. GIMP can handle the conversion au-
tomatically, but the results may sometimes be disappointing due to this limitation
of GIF.
Despite the poor compression and limited number of colors, there are two desir-
able features of GIF for web designers. They are simple forms of transparency
and animation. GIMP’s GIF filter supports both of these features.
 

Support for creating GIFs may not be included in your version of

GIMP due to patent problems.
 

BMP: W INDOWS Bitmap This format is often used by applications for Microsoft W IN -
DOWS . Full color images can be stored in this format, but shortcomings of the
compression scheme mean that the resulting files may be quite large. Image
resolution is preserved, but no other metadata is stored in the BMP format.
Some web browsers have included support for viewing BMP images but this is
not common, so you should avoid using them on the web.
CHAPTER 2. USING GIMP 23

XPM: X Pixmap This format is sometimes used by applications for the X W INDOW
S YSTEM. The files created can be compiled directly into a program by a software
developer, but this convenience comes at a price of much increased file size. You
will probably already know if this feature is useful to you.
Some web browsers have included support for viewing XPM images but this is
not common, so you should avoid using them on the web.

TIFF: Tagged Image File Format One of the oldest formats still commonly in use to-
day, TIFF is a very powerful but complicated format. If you need to export images
from GIMP to a package which doesn’t support any of the other formats men-
tioned earlier in this section, it will probably accept TIFF. TIFF can preserve all
the transparency and color of your original image, but you may lose some of this
information when importing the TIFF into another package.
CHAPTER3

ToolBox

3.1 Toolbox Introduction

In this chapter we’ll explain to you the menus and buttons of the Toolbox.

3.2 The ToolBox

One of the windows that is most central to the use of T HE GIMP is the ToolBox.
The ToolBox

The ToolBox consists of the menu bar with the entries File, Xtns and Help, the
tools buttons which are the set of square buttons in 24, the color selector which is at the
bottom left, and the tools status indicators which are at the bottom right.
Almost all the tools in the toolbox have options which you can configure to define
how the tool operates. You can access theseTool Options either by double clicking on
the tool’s icon or selecting Tool Options from the Dialogs submenu.

3.3 Module Browser

The Module Brower is an interface for currently loaded and available modules in GIMP,
along with information about the module. The current GIMP uses modules only for color
selectors (there is also a gamma display module). In the module browser you can set if
these modules should be loaded at start up (this button is non-functional at the moment
and all modules will be loaded by default).

24
CHAPTER 3. TOOLBOX 25

You can also unload a module on the fly, e.g. you may not want the watercolor color
selector. If you unload a module, the functionality provided by the module will no longer
be available in your current GIMP session. To enable the functionality again, you have
to mark the module and reload it.

3.4 Help Page for Help

Well, what about a help page for a help. In the Help Dialog, if you are using the GIMP
HELP BROWSER , you will see three tabs – Index, Contents, and the current help page
(this is the tab where you are reading this text).
In the Index tab you will find links to most of the subjects in the GIMP help system.
In the Contents tab you will find links built up of a hierarchy. This will enable you to find
all help pages about a special area of GIMP (e.g all help  pages
 about selections).
F1 
You can invoke the help system either by pressing  in a GIMP dialog or window
 
or by pressing 
F1 
when a menu item is active. For example, go into a menu and hover
 
over a menuentry, such as Grow, now press  F1 and the help page for Grow will be

loaded into the HELP 
 
BROWSER .
If you press 
Shift 
F1 
then you will get a ? sign which you can point and click on
buttons and other items in GIMP. If the item has help available, the help document is
loaded into the HELP BROWSER.Additional
 Information
Default Keyboard Shortcut:  F1 

3.5 Context Help

 
 
Help If you press Shift 
F1 
then you will get a ? sign which you can point and click on
buttons and other items in The GIMP. If the item has help available, the help document
is loaded into the HELP B ROWSER 
  Information
 . Additional
Default Keyboard Shortcut: 
Shift 
F1 

3.6 Tip of the Day

Displays a useful tip each time you start GIMP. You can browse all available tips by
clicking the Previous Tip and Next Tip buttons. To disable this, just uncheck Show tip
next time GIMP starts.
If you have any useful tips, please submit them to the GIMP developers for possible
inclusion in future releases.

3.7 About Dialog

The About dialog shows which GIMP version you are running and also, in random
order, the people who have contributed to the GIMP project. To close the dialog, click
anywhere on it.
CHAPTER4

Image

4.1 Image Menu Introduction

This chapter will explain the GIMP Image main menu and its submenus. All operations
here a basic functions on image properties and global program functionality such as
selections, views, clipboards and basic manipulations with lookuptables.

4.2 The Image Window

Image The image window is the one that you will see when you are composing your
image.
The Image Window

The main part of the window is the section in which your image can be created. See
the help for the tools for more information on what can be done.
By default, the image window is bordered at the top and left by a ruler which is
measured in pixels at 100 pixel intervals or in the unit you choose in the preferences
dialog. There is an arrow on each ruler which show the vertical and horizontal position
of the cursor when your pointer is within the window. The position of the cursor can also
be seen in figures at the bottom left corner of the window if turned on. This is in the
format X direction, Y direction and is in pixels or the image’s unit.

26
CHAPTER 4. IMAGE 27

Also at the bottom of the image window (on the Statusbar) is the filename and other
information about the image such as the zoom level. This is also displayed as the title
to the window. The information displayed can be configured in Preferences ( Image
Windows, Image Title Format). Next to this is a section which displays a progress bar
when an operation will take a long time. That action can be aborted by clicking the
Cancel button next to it.
Just above the coordinates display, there are two buttons, one which shows a ,
and the other a red square. Clicking the invokes the “Quick Mask”. This adds
an extra channel which can be edited to make complex selections. Once the mask
has been edited to your satisfaction, click the dotted square to convert it into a standard
selection. The color and opacity of the mask can be configured by double-clicking either
button.
The final feature of the image window is the . Clicking and holding this button
will show a small preview of the whole image. This is particularly useful when you are
working at very high zoom levels and want to see how your changes affect the overall
image. Moving within this box will move the picture to the desired location and remain
there after the button is lifted.
Many of these features can be configured, or turned on and off in Preferences
Image Windows, so you may need to make some changes to see all the features.

4.3 Image history

4.3.1 Undo
The Undo function allows you to revert an image a step back in the drawing or editting
process. For example, if you paint a single stroke with the paintbrush on your image,
clicking Undo will remove it. If you paint two strokes, releasing the mouse button or pen
in between, you must Undo twice to undo both changes. If you want to undo multiple
changes at once, you may prefer to use theUndo History dialog ( Image Menu Dialogs
Undo History...).
You can configure the number of undo levels (how many steps back you can take) in
File Preferences... then Environment Levels of Undo. You can set this figure
as high as you like, but you should note that every undo step takes up memory so keep
this figure low if you don’t have much
  memory. Additional Information
Ctrl 
Default Keyboard Shortcut:  Z

4.3.2 Redo
The Redo function is the reverse of the Undo function. Redo undoes an undo – if you
have painted a line with the Paintbrush and then clicked Undo to remove it, you can
make it reappear by clicking Redo.
As with the Undo function, you may want to use theUndo History ( Image Menu
Dialogs Undo History...) which allows you to make multiple Undo and Redo oper-
 
ations at once. Additional Information
Default Keyboard Shortcut:  Ctrl 
R

CHAPTER 4. IMAGE 28

4.4 Clipboards

4.4.1 Cut
The Cut function allows you to delete a selection save it to the GIMP clipboard. It can
then be recalled with the Paste, Paste Into, and Paste As New commands. If no
 entire
selection is made, GIMP cuts the 
 current layer. Additional Information
Default Keyboard Shortcut: Ctrl 
X

4.4.2 Copy
The Copy command allows you to make a copy of the current selection, which is then
stored in the GIMP clipboard. This copy can be recalled by using the Paste, Paste
Into, and Paste As New commands. If no selection is made, GIMP copies the entire
 
current layer. Additional Information 
Default Keyboard Shortcut:  Ctrl 
C

4.4.3 Paste
The Paste function puts whatever is in the GIMP clipboard from the last Copy or Cut
command into the current image. The pasted section will remain as a “Floating Selec-
tion” which appears as a separate layer in theLayers Dialog which can be opened by
Image Menu> Dialogs> Layers, Channels and Paths.... This selection can be
moved just as any floating selection can. Once the selection is properly located, click
elsewhere on the image to merge the pasted section back into the current layer or r ight
click the entry in the layers dialog, and click Anchor Layer or New Layer.
 

You can only have one floating selection at any one time and cannot work
on a layer while there is a floating selection.
 
Additional Information   
Ctrl 
Default Keyboard Shortcut:  V

4.4.4 Paste Into

The Paste Into command performs the same function as the Paste command, except
it pastes into the current selection. The clipboard contents are centered in the current
selection and cropped as needed. If no selection is made, the function is the same as
Paste.

4.4.5 Paste As New

Paste as New makes a new image containing the contents of the GIMP clipboard.
The clipboard contains whatever was last put there from a Cut or Copy. The new image
will have the exact dimensions required to contain the contents of the clipboard. Use
Image Menu> Image> Canvas Size... to modify this as desired.
CHAPTER 4. IMAGE 29

4.4.6 Cut Named

Cut the current selection to a named buffer. You can cut several parts to different buffers
by giving them different names. Later on you are able to paste a selected buffer by invok-
ing Image Menu> Edit> Buffer> Paste Named.... If you don’t specify a selection,
 
Information
the whole active layer is cut. Additional 

Default Keyboard Shortcut:  Shift  Ctrl
  X

4.4.7 Copy Named

Copies the current selection of the image to a named buffer. You can copy several parts
to different buffers by giving them different names. Later on you are able to paste a
buffer by invoking Image Menu> Edit> Buffer> Paste Named.... If you don’t specify
 will be
a selection, the whole active layer  
 copied.
 Additional Information
Default Keyboard Shortcut:  Shift 
Ctrl 
C

4.4.8 Paste Named

Paste GIMP has a cut and copy buffer, seeCut Named andCopy Named. Objects cut
or copied with those functions are available for pasting in Paste Named.
In the dialog, there is a list of all available buffers. You select the buffer to paste by
clicking on it. When the buffer is selected, you have three options to paste it:Paste,Paste
Into, andPaste As New.
You can also manage buffers in the dialog. If you want to delete a buffer, you select
it and click on the Delete button. To exit the buffer without pasting, you click on Cancel.
This will cancel the paste operation but it will not cancel delete operations. Additional
Information  
  
Default Keyboard Shortcut:  Shift  Ctrl
  V

4.5 Operations with selections

4.5.1 Clear
The Clear function allows you to delete everything contained in the current selection.
If nothing is selected, GIMP will clear everything in the current layer. If the layer has an
alpha channel (transparency), the cleared area is made transparent1 Without an alpha
channel, the cleared selection is filled with the current background color. If you have
made a selection and click clear, the selection will still remain once the clear function
is completed. Unlike Cut, Clear does not put the contents into the GIMP clipboard.
The current contents of the GIMP 
 clipboard
 are unaffected. Additional Information
Default Keyboard Shortcut:  Ctrl K


1
The color information of the selection is not destroyed, just made transparent. The anti-erase function of
the Eraser tool can return the area to opaque.
CHAPTER 4. IMAGE 30

4.5.2 Fill
Fill fills the selected area with the foreground color for Fill with FG Color or back-
ground color Fill with BG Color. If no selection is made, GIMP fills the entire layer.
Additional Information      
Default Keyboard Shortcuts:  Ctrl ,

for filling with the foreground color, Ctrl
  .
for
background.

4.5.3 Stroke
The Stroke command is used in conjunction with the selection tools to create shapes
which would be difficult to draw freehand. To use Stroke, first make a selection using
any of the selection tools. With a suitable brush selected ( File Dialogs Brushes...),
click Edit Stroke. A line using the selected brush will be drawn with the center of the
brush on the selection line.

4.6 Selection operations

4.6.1 Invert Selection

Select Invert selects everything on the current layer which wasn’t originally selected
(it selects the opposite). If nothing in the image is selected before using this function,
 
the whole layer is selected. Additional  Information
Default Keyboard Shortcut:  Ctrl 
I

4.6.2 Select All

Select All selects everything in
 the 
current layer. Additional Information
Default Keyboard Shortcut: 
Ctrl 
A

4.6.3 Select None

Select None cancels all selections. If nothing is selected, this function will do nothing.
A floating selection is not affected.
 Additional
 
  Information
Default Keyboard Shortcut: 
Shift 
Ctrl 
A

4.6.4 Float Selection

Select Float converts the current selection into a “Floating Selection”. A floating se-
lection appears in theLayers Dialog ( Image Menu Dialogs Layers, Channels and
Paths...) and can be manipulated in the same way as any other layer. To merge the
floating selection back into the image, either click elsewhere on the image or right click
the entry in the Layers dialog and select Anchor Layer. It can also be converted into
a New Layer.
CHAPTER 4. IMAGE 31

 

If you drag a selection, it will automatically be converted into a floating

one.
 
Additional Information  
  
Default Keyboard Shortcut: 
Shift 
Ctrl
  L

4.6.5 Feather Selection

In the Feather Selection dialog you select by how much you want to feather the selection.
Feather Selection produces a selection with fuzzy edges. In other words, when a
selection is feathered, it becomes more and more transparent until it reaches the edges
of the selection. Feather allows you to blend a color or image softly into the background.
Additional Information  
  
Default Keyboard Shortcut:  Shift Ctrl
  F

4.6.6 Sharpen Selection

Select Sharpen This sharpens the edges of a selection, undoing fuzziness or feather-
ing. Additional Information  
 

Default Keyboard Shortcut: 
Shift 
Ctrl 
H

4.6.7 Shrink Selection

Will shrink the selection (not the content of the selection but the selection itself) by an
arbitrary amount measured in the set unit (usually pixels).

4.6.8 Grow Selection

Will grow the selection (not the content of the selection but the selection itself) by an
arbitrary amount measured in the set unit (usually pixels).

4.6.9 Border Selection

Border Selection creates a new selection surrounding the outline of the old one. The
new selection is a hollow border area or frame in the specified width that covers an area
both outside and inside the original selection edge.

4.6.10 Save Selection to Channel

“ Save to Channel” creates a new channel containing the current selection. The
channel can be seen and manipulated in theChannels Dialog ( Image Menu Dialogs
Layers, Channels and Paths...), and will be called “ Selection Mask Copy”.
CHAPTER 4. IMAGE 32

4.7 Customizing the view

4.7.1 Zoom
The Zoom functions allow you to modify the magnification on an image. It enables you
to zoom out on large images so the entire image is visible, or to zoom in on an image to
do pixel-level editting.
Zoom in zooms 100% in each time it is clicked up to a maximum of 1600%. Zoom
out zooms out at progressively smaller intervals to a maximum of 6%. Note that for large
images, zooming out may take a short while because GIMP has to load extra parts of
the image from memory. Additional
 Information  
Default Keyboard Shortcuts: =
for “Zoom In”, -
for “Zoom Out” and 1
for “1:1”.

4.7.2 Dot for Dot

Turns “Dot for Dot” viewing on or off. When turned on, every point in the image is shown
as one point on the screen.

4.7.3 The Info Window

The General Tab

Dimension (w x h) Shows the image height and width both in pixels and in the current
unit.

Resolution Shows the current resolution.

Scale Ratio Shows the current zoom factor.

Display Type Shows the current image mode.

V isual Class Shows the visual class of your display.

V isual Depth Shows the visual depth of your display.

The Extended Tab

Shows you the current pixel value while you move the pointer over the image without
pressing any buttons. In effect, it is a color picker that does not affect the current color.
Instead it gives you the pixel value regardless of the current tool or color. For information
 see
on how to interpret the pixel value, theColor

 Picker tool. Additional Information
Default Keyboard Shortcut:  Shift  Ctrl
  I

4.7.4 The Navigation Window

The Navigation Window allows you to quickly and easily move around the image cur-
rently being edited. The dialog shows a small preview of the whole image. The section
of the image which is visible in the image window (where the editing takes place) is high-
lighted by a black square. The current scale factor of the image is also shown as a ratio.
The zoom factor can be changed by moving the slider (left to zoom out, right to zoom
CHAPTER 4. IMAGE 33

in) or clicking the magnifying glass icons. You can also drag the highlighted square
to pan the image (to change which part is viewable in the image window). Additional
Information  
  
Default Keyboard Shortcut:  Shift 
Ctrl
  N

4.7.5 Toggle Selection

Turns on and off the appearance of the dotted selections (marching ants).
 

The selection still exists when the dotted lines are turned off.

 
Additional Information   
Default Keyboard Shortcut: 
Ctrl 
T

4.7.6 Toggle Rulers

Turns on/off the rulers at the top and left of the image window, and the to access
the image menu.

4.7.7 Toggle Statusbar

Turns on and off the bar at the bottom of the image window containing the coordinates,
file name, progress bar, and Cancel
 button.

  Additional Information
Default Keyboard Shortcut: 
Shift 
Ctrl 
S

4.7.8 Toggle Guides

This option toggles the visibility 
of the guides
 
  in the image. Additional Information
Shift 
Default Keyboard Shortcut:  Ctrl 
T

4.7.9 Snap to Guides

Toggles the “magnetic guides” mode on or off. When turned on, the cursor will snap to
the guides as soon as it gets very close to them. This option is very handy for precisely
drawing circles, ellipses, and lines.

4.7.10 New View

Creates a newImage Window for the current image which can be configured differently,
such as a different zoom level, turning on or off image window features, etc.
 

This window is not a separate file, but a different view of the same file.

 
CHAPTER 4. IMAGE 34

Changes made in one view will appear in other views. It is very useful for maintaining
an overall view of an image while working on close-up retouching.

4.7.11 Shrink Wrap

Makes the borders of the image window shrink or grow to the same size as the image
itself. Additional Information   
Default Keyboard Shortcut: 
Ctrl 
E

4.8 Changing the imagetype

4.8.1 Convert to RGB

Convert to RGB allows you to change an image which is either in grayscale or indexed
format into a full-color RGB image. When creating images which use low color formats
such as GIF, it is often best to save a copy in RGB format so that no information is lost
and you can edit the image again later. Be sure to use a GIMP-native format if your
image includes transparency and  layers.
 Additional Information

Alt 
Default Keyboard Shortcut:  R

4.8.2 Convert to Grayscale

Convert to Grayscale removes all color from the current image, in the same way as
Desaturate. However, this also changes the image mode which means that no color
can be added to image. If you choose a color and try to paint on a grayscale image, that
color will automatically be desaturated and will appear as a shade of gray. Additional
Information   
Default Keyboard Shortcut:  Alt 
G

4.8.3 Convert to Indexed

Indexed Mode This mode enables you to convert RGB or grayscale images to indexed
images. An indexed image is an image which only has the colors specified in its color
palette. The color palette is saved in the image file. The maximum number of colors in
an indexed image is 256. If you want to make transparent GIF images, then you can
only use a maximum of 255 colors since the last color will be used to determine if the
pixel is opaque or transparent.

Palette Options

Generate optimal palette For the most part, this option is the best to use when creat-
ing an indexed image. GIMP will evaluate your colors and create a color palette
suitable for the image. You can specify the number of colors that you want to have
in your indexed image, but remember that you can’t have more than 255 colors if
are about to create an indexed image with transparency.
CHAPTER 4. IMAGE 35

Use custom palette If you want to use a predefined palette, you have to use this
option. You then choose your palette from the drop down menu. By default it’s
W eb palette. The W eb palette is the palette used by web browsers such as
N ETSCAPE. This will help you create web-safe indexed images.
 

There is some debate over indexing against the Web palette.

 

Custom Palette Options Remove unused colors from final palette: If the palette con-
tains colors that aren’t used in the indexed image, you can remove the extra colors
and make the image file size smaller. This is a good option so keep it enabled.

Use black/white (1-bit) palette This option will create a monochrome image only built
up of black and white pixels.

Dithering

An indexed image can only be built up of a maximum of 256 colors. Most of the time this
is quite limiting and you will not be able to have all the colors in your image represented
in this limited color space. The image might look like it is built up of “bands” or “color
areas”. To make indexed images look better, you can dither them. This means that two
or more colors are mixed to mimic the missing color. The disadvantage is that the image
can look like it’s built up of “dots”.

No color dithering Will disable dithering completely.

Positioned color dithering Use this option when you are dealing with animations
such as GIF animations. The problem with dithering in animations is that the
dithering will not be constant. If you choose positioned dithering instead, the
dithering in constant areas will remain constant across your frames. It is not as
good as F loyd Steinberg dithering, but is better than no dithering at all.

F loyd Steinberg color dithering (reduced color bleeding) With normal Floyd Stein-
berg dithering, you may experience too much color bleeding. This is very visible
when you index gradients, causing an unnatural look. If you encounter this ef-
fect, it is advisable to use this option (i.e Floyd Steinberg dithering reduced colour
bleeding).

F loyd Steinberg dithering (normal) This is the best option to use when you are in-
dexing images. It is only in special cases that you will use the other dithering
methods available.

Enable dithering of transparency Indexed images only have one transparency mode
– either it is off (the pixel is totally solid) or on (the pixel is totally transparent).
This makes it very difficult to index images with smooth transitions from opaque to
transparent. When you enable dithering of transparency, GIMP will try to mimic
the smooth transition by dithering pixels on and off.
CHAPTER 4. IMAGE 36

 

A good alternative to transparency dithering is the Rightclick>

Filters> Colors> Semi-Flatten function.
 

Additional Information   
Default Keyboard Shortcut: 
Alt 
I

4.9 Image operations with lookuptables

4.9.1 Desaturate
Desaturate is used for removing color from the current selection. If no selection is
made, color is removed from the entirety of the current layer. The result of desaturation
is similar toConvert to Grayscale, but it does not change the image mode to grayscale
and can be performed on a single selection or layer.

4.9.2 Invert
The Invert function converts every color in the selection to its opposite. For example,
black becomes white, yellow becomes blue, etc. The result of this operation is similar
to a photographic negative of the original image. You can see what the opposite of all
colors is by looking at the GTK color selector (double-click the foreground or background
color, and select the GTK tab). The opposite color is the one at the opposite side of the
color wheel.
If no selection is made, the entire layer is inverted.

4.9.3 Equalize
This functions equalizes either the whole contents of an image or the area specified by
a selection. It operates on a histogram of the images. An equalized image has a uniform
distribution of intensity levels. That is, it has about the same amount of dark pixels as
light pixels. Equalization means taking an image and making it have such properties.
The result will be an image whose intensity histogram is almost flat.

4.10 Canvas operations

4.10.1 Offset
Offset moves the current layer or channel up, down, left, or right by the chosen number
of pixels. When the edges overrun the dimensions of the layer, you can decide if they
are wrapped or not. Offset can be used to place layers or floating selections at a specific
position in the image.
Offset is useful if you want to move layers a very exact amount or if you’d like to
move them without extending the layer border. The other important application of this
command is to create seamless tiles for patterns.
CHAPTER 4. IMAGE 37

If the “ Wrap Around” button is checked, the parts of the image that move outside
the layer border will turn up on the other side of the image. If you don’t want this, you can
choose to fill the empty area with the background color or with transparency. Additional
Information  
  
Default Keyboard Shortcut:  Shift Ctrl
  O

4.10.2 Set Canvas Size

Canvas Size The image canvas is the boundary of the image. Even if you have a
smaller or larger layer than the image boundary size, the maximum image area that you
can view is determined by the canvas size.
The size area will control how big or small your new canvas will be, just as when
you created a new image. The Offset area will control how your canvas is clipped or
expanded.

Making the canvas smaller The offset fields will control how the upper left corner of
the old canvas will be positioned in the new canvas. The best way to control the
new location and how it will be cropped is to drag the “canvas preview” in the
Offset frame to the chosen position. After that you make the final adjustments
with the spin buttons (or type it in by hand). The thin outline is the new canvas
size and you have to drag the old canvas to the correct position so it will be
cropped according to your demands.

Making the canvas larger The offset fields will control how the upper left corner of the
old canvas will be positioned in the new canvas. The best way to control the
new location and how the canvas will be to be expanded is to drag the “canvas
preview” in the Offset frame to the correct position. After that you make the final
adjustments with the spin buttons (or type it in by hand). The outline/canvas is
the new canvas size and you have to drag the old canvas to the desired position
within it.

If you uncheck the Chain Button in the Size area, you will be able to have different
proportions for the new canvas. It’s thereby possible, for example, to have a canvas
which is smaller in X direction and bigger in Y direction than before the resize.

4.10.3 Scale Image

Scales the image content and the canvas size. The difference between “Scale Image”
andSet Canvas Size is that “Set Canvas Size” will resize the canvas without scaling
image content. It will only add some space around the image or crop the image.
 

Scale Image will scale the whole image. You can scale only the active layer
with Scale Layer.
 
You set the new image size either by altering the size or the ratio. You can also set
the resolution of the image. If you lower the resolution, the image will get bigger (in real
units, but not in pixels). You therefore have to compensate it with a smaller pixel size if
CHAPTER 4. IMAGE 38

you still want the same image size but a lower resolution. It will naturally be vice versa
if you increase the resolution. Pixel Dimension area is used to resize the pixels.
 
If theLayers of your image have different sizes, it is possible that making the
image smaller will shrink some of them completely away. If this happens,
you will bewarned before the operation is applied.
 

4.10.4 Scale Layer Warning

 
Scaling this image to this resolution will shrink one or more layers to the
point that they can no longer exist. Click OK if you wish to continue, or
click Cancel to return to theScale Image Dialog.
 

4.10.5 Duplicate
Duplicate creates a new image which is an exact copy of the current one. The GIMP
 Information
clipboard is unaffected. Additional 

Default Keyboard Shortcut:  Ctrl 
D

CHAPTER5

Layers

5.1 What are Layers?

Layers When you create an image, it is made up of thousands of tiny pixels, each of
which has a color, position, and form the image. It can be hard to work on an image
organized at this level. It is also hard to work on an entire image as one block – this is
the reason for layers. Layers are in between the tiny size of pixels and the large size of
the whole image.
Using layers, you can construct an image of several conceptual parts which can be
manipulated without affecting any other part of the image. Layers are stacked on top of
each other. The bottom layer is the background of the image and then components in
the foreground of the image come above it. Layers can be made to affect the look of
layers below them. If, for example, a layer is made translucent, layers underneath will
look faded without layer being altered at all. If the translucent layer is later removed, the
image below returns to how it looked before.

39
CHAPTER 5. LAYERS 40

3D Representation of an Image with Layers

The Final Image

Layers are one of the most powerful features in GIMP so it is important to under-
stand how they can be used.

5.2 Using Layers

Layers Layer-related functions in GIMP are performed in theLayers Dialog which can
be
 accessed

 from File Dialogs Layers, Channels& Paths... or by pressing
Ctrl 
L

CHAPTER 5. LAYERS 41

The Layers Dialog

At the top of the dialog is a combo-box which defines what image the layers dialog
is displaying. If Auto is selected, the currently focused image will be the default. Alter-
nativly, you can change the image by clicking on the box and selecting a different image
from the menu. A small preview of the image is given next to its name.
The most useful part of the dialog is the area with the off-white background in 41.
This shows all the layers in the image. The topmost layer is at the top of the dialog. Each
layer has a name, such as “Background”, “Wilber” and “Text - GIMP” in the example
above. Every layer must have a unique name. Next to the layers name, a small preview
of the contents of that layer is displayed. You should also give layers a suitable name
which describes their contents so that you can find them later.
Next to the layer preview is up to two icons. You can see in 41 that the layer “Hor-
izontal Line” has both an “eye” icon and a “four-way arrow” icon. The eye means that
the image is visible. Clicking the eye will make that layer invisible in the image window,
although it still exists. Clicking again makes the layer visible again. The four-way arrow
means that that layer is linked to all other layers which are also showing the four-way
arrow. In this circumstance, when you move an one layer, the linked layers will also
move.
The Opacity function above the layers list defines as a percentage how transparent
(see-through) a layer is. 100.0 makes the layer opaque, and 0.0 makes it completely
transparent. The Mode function defines how the layer interacts with the layers beneath
it.
The layers menu also contains a menu to perform functions. It is accessible by
r ight clicking on the layers list area.
CHAPTER 5. LAYERS 42

The Layers Menu

5.3 The Layers Dialog

The Layers Dialog is the main interface to interact withLayers present in a GIMP image.
You can think of layers as a stack of slides or clothes on your body. GIMP gives you
several methods of combining layers with help of modes. The mode of a layer will
determine how it will interact with other layers present in the image.
Before you can do anything with a layer, the layer must be activated.1 You do so by
clicking on the layer name. If you double click on the name you will be able toset the
layer attributes of that layer.
If you right click on the layer name you will be able to access the layer menu. Within
the layer menu you have access to several other layer commands, see 39.
With the Opacity slider you control the general transparency of the currently active
layer. The K eep Trans check button controls whether or not you can paint on the trans-
parent areas of you layer. If it is checked, you can’t paint on transparent areas of the
layer (i.e. you can only paint on opaque areas).
In the button row you have six layer command buttons,New Layer,Raise Layer,Lower
Layer,Duplicate Layer,Anchor Layer andDelete Layer.
The GIMP’s Layer Dialog is by default in Auto mode so it will always show the
image that you are working with. You can, however, switch this off and choose another
image to work with from the drop down menu.
1
if you only have one layer that layer is always active
CHAPTER 5. LAYERS 43

5.4 New Layer

Will create a new layer. You can set the new layers attributes in the Layer Name field
please seeEdit Layer Attributes for an explanation of layer attributes. Just as inNew
Image can you also set the "Fill Type" to either the Foreground or Background color of
theToolBox, White or totally Transparent.
The size of the layer can be set in a number of different ways and units. Default is to
measure the new layer in pixels which is the best if you are dealing with web graphics,
but if you going to print your image then real world units such as inches is probably the
preferred.

5.5 Stack
The “Stack” refers to the set ofLayers which forms an image. The layers are arranged
one on top of another. The stack functions allow you to alter the order in which the
layers appear. You can either raise the layer by one place, lower it by one place, raise
the layer to the top of the entire stack, or lower it to the bottom. Layers can also be
moved by dragging the layer up or down in the layers dialog, or by using the
and icons.

5.6 Duplicate Layer

Creates a copy of the active layer and places it above the copied layer. The new layer
will have “copy” added to the name of the copied layer as its name. This function is the
same as clicking the icon.

5.7 Anchor Layer

Anchor Layer is used to merge a floating selection with the layer which was active before
the floating selection was made. This is the same as clicking the icon.

5.8 Delete Layer

Deletes the active layer. The layer below the deleted layer will become the active layer.
This is the same as clicking the icon.

5.9 Layer Boundary Size

The Layer Boundary Size lets you set the the boundary of the layer. Remember you
can have a smaller or larger layer than the image boundary size. When you enlarge the
boundary size, then you will add some space to paint on to your layer. Naturally it will
be vice versa when you make the boundary size smaller.
CHAPTER 5. LAYERS 44

The Size area will control how big or small your new layer boundary will be just as
when you created aNew Layer. The Offset area will control how your layer is clipped or
expanded.
The Offset fields will control where your upper left corner of the old layer will be
in the “new” layer. The best way to control the new location and how and where the
layer will be clipped is to drag the “layer preview” in the Offset area to the right position.
Make the final adjustment with the spin buttons (or type it in by hand) if it needs to be
pixel-exact. The thin outline is the new layer size and you have to drag the old layer to
the right position so it will be clipped according to your demands. If you make the layer
larger then the outline/canvas is the new layer size and you have to drag the old layer to
the right position within it.

5.9.1 The Chain Button

If you uncheck the chain in the "Size" area, you will be able to have different ratios when
you make the "new" layer . It’s therefore possible e.g. to have a layer which is smaller
in X direction and larger in Y direction than before you altered the layer boundary size.

5.10 Layer to Image Size

Resizes the layer, but doesn’t stretch or shrink its contents to fit the size of the image.
When making smaller, it will crop the layer. A layer made larger adds transparent filling
around the previous contents. If it is the background layer, the background color is used
as fill.

5.11 Scale Layer

Will scale the layer content, and also make the layer boundary either size smaller or
larger. The difference between "Scale Layer" andSet Layer Boundary Size is that "Set
Layer Boundary Size" will enable you to have a smaller or bigger layer without scaling
the layer content (i.e. it will only add some space to on around the layer or clip the layer).
 

"Scale Layer" will only scale the currently active layer.Scale Image will
scale all layers in the image.
 
You can set the new layer size either by altering the size or ratio. You have have
exactly the same options as in theNew Layer dialog.

5.12 Merge Visible Layers

5.12.1 General
Merge Visible Layers will combine all currently visible layers into one layer. Invisible
layers aren’t effected and will stay as they were before the merge. There are three ways
to merge visible layers:
CHAPTER 5. LAYERS 45

Expanded as necessary

The final layer has the size of the largest layer of all of the visible layers. (Remember
that a layer in GIMP can be larger than the image)

Clipped to image

Will set the final layer size equal to the image size. (Remember that layers in GIMP can
be larger than the image it self. If you have such a visible layer it will be clipped to the
image size).

Clipped to bottom layer

Will set the final layer size equal to the bottom layer. If the bottom layer is smaller than
some of your visible layers, then the final layer will be clipped and trimmed according to
both the size and position of the bottom layer.

5.13 Merge Down

Merges the contents of the active layer with the layer below. The resulting layer will have
the name of the lower layer.

5.14 Flatten Image

Flatten image repeatedly merges the layers down onto the background layer. This func-
tion is useful when saving to formats which don’t support layers such as JPEG.

5.15 Add Layer Mask

Adds a layer mask to the currently active layer. A layer mask controls the transparency
of the current layer . The mask itself is a grayscale image where black pixels are trans-
parent and white pixels are opaque. This works on a grey level also, allowing gradiented
masking.
 
Adding a mask to a layer has the same effect as adding a secondAlpha
Channel for that layer. In fact, both are applied to the layer in the same
way, first Alpha, then Mask.
 
The Add Mask Options dialog allows you to choose the initial fill of the layer mask.
Black will make the layer totally transparent; White will make the layer totally opaque,
or you can choose to initialize the mask using the alpha channel of the layer. When you
choose the alpha channel the transparency of each pixel will be mapped to a grayscale
value in the mask. If you want to further manipulate the transparency in a layer, this
option can be useful.
To paint on the layer mask you have to activate it. You do that by clicking on the
thumbnail image of the mask. However you will not see the mask, you will just see the
CHAPTER 5. LAYERS 46

 
result of your mask applied to the layer. To see the mask you have to 
Alt 
click on the
 
thumbnail. If you want to see you layer without the mask applied, 
Ctrl click on the
mask thumbnail. Remember to click once again with the same modifier key to exit the
current "preview" state.

5.16 Apply Layer Mask

Sorry, but the help page for "Apply Layer Mask" is not written yet.

5.17 Delete Layer Mask

Sorry, but the help page for "Delete Layer Mask" is not written yet.

5.18 Layer Mask to Selection

Turns the Layer Mask into a selection based on the intensity of the mask.

5.19 Add Alpha Channel

Once you have added an Alpha Channel, the background layer can be moved up and
down through the layer stack in the same way as any other layer.

5.20 Alpha to Selection

Turns the layer’s Alpha Channel into a selection based on the Alpha Channel’s opacity.

5.21 Edit Layer Attributes

5.21.1 General
Lets you specify the name of the current layer. The name can also hold important
information about how to interpret a possible animation of the layers (e.g. if you save
the image as a GIF you can set options about how to play the animated GIF).

Animation Attributes

The animation attributes is specified as follows. Layer_Name (delay in ms) (combination_mode)

e.g. Frame_1 (100ms) (replace)
The delay will specify the time each frame is visible in the animation. A delay of e.g.
hundred milliseconds will have the following format: (100ms).
The combination mode will specify if you will combine with the previous layer or
replace it. The two modes are either (combine) or (replace).
CHAPTER6

Channels

6.1 Channels Introduction

This chapter will explain the use of channels.

6.2 The Channels Dialog

Channels The Channels tab displays the three RGB channels, showing the current red,
green, or blue color values of each pixel in your image. The RGB channel thumbnails
are grayscale representations of each color channel with white representing 100color
and black representing no color.
The RGB channels each have an icon, so you can look at your image in a single
color channel. Click off the eye icon in the Blue and Green channels, so that only the
Red channel is visible. Bright red in the red channel is the equivalent of a maximum red
value for that pixel; black means that the pixel has no red at all in it. You will see bright
red for areas that are white or bright red. If all three channels have maximum values for
an area, that area is white in the actual image.
The RGB channels are always active when a layer is active. They display the color
values of all visible layers, not just the active one. Unlike layers, the RGB channels
can all be active at the same time. You can also choose to work in one or two specific
color channels by clicking on the appropriate channels to activate the ones you want
and deactivate the ones you don’t want.

You can create new channels by clicking the button. This will bring
up theNew Channel dialog where you can set name, color, and fill amount of the new
channel. If you want to alter the values later on, you just double click on the channel
which will bring up theEdit Channel Attributes dialog. Normally you don’t work with extra
channels, but they can be very handy for creating and storing selections.
If you r ight click on the layer name you will be able to access the layer menu. In the
layer menu you have access to several other layer commands, see 47.
An experienced user can also use them to create patterns and advanced colored
images. The channel stack tools and are more or less only useful when
you work with those kind of images.

47
CHAPTER 6. CHANNELS 48

6.2.1 Selections and Channels

You are able to store a selection as a channel with the r ightclick Select Save To
Channel command. This creates a new channel where you can paint, erase, and per-
form any other drawing function. The altered channel can be turned into a selection
again by clicking on the Channel To Selection button. This is a very convenient
way to alter selections and store several selections. In fact, you can create selections
from scratch by creating a new channel, altering it, and then applying Channel To Se-
lection.

6.3 The New Channel Dialog

Allows you to alter the name, color and fill opacity of the new channel.
The fill opacity is useful for setting how visible the underlying image is when you
work with a channel that will later be converted to a selection. The advanced user will
also use it to “control” ink opacity when he works with things like duotones. Also you
have the opportunity to set a color which the channel will use when it’s active.
 
The color field is a multifunction widget – doubleclicking with your left
mousebutton will show the color selector and you can drag and drop colors
from any color field in GIMP.
 

6.4 Raise Channel

Channels are stacked on top of each of each other in the same way as layers. You can
raise them using this function. Channels can also be raised by dragging the channel up
in theChannels Dialog or by using the icon.

6.5 Lower Channel

Channels are stacked on top of each of each other in the same way as layers. You can
lower them using this function. Channels can also be lowered by dragging the channel
down in theChannels Dialog, or by using the icon.

6.6 Duplicate Channel

Creates a copy of the active channel and places it above the copied channel. The new
channel will have “copy” postfixed to its name. This function is the same as clicking the
icon.

6.7 Channel to Selection

Turns a custom channel into a selection based on the intensity of its grayscale mask.
CHAPTER 6. CHANNELS 49

6.8 Delete Channel

Deletes the active channel. The channel below the deleted channel will become the
active channel. You cannot delete the standard Red, Green, or Blue channels. This is
the equivalent of clicking the icon.

6.9 Edit Channel Attributes

Allows you to alter the name, color and fill opacity of the channel.
The fill opacity is useful for setting how visible the underlying image is when you
work with a channel that will later be converted to a selection. The advanced user will
also use it to “control” ink opacity when he works with things like duotones.
CHAPTER7

Paths

7.1 Paths Introduction

In this chapter we’ll explain to you how you can work with paths.

7.2 The Paths Dialog

Basically paths are a way to storebezier selections. Limiting paths to that statement
misses a lot of their functionality, however. A better way to see it is as a way to man-
age vector curves. If you are familiar with vector drawing programs such as A DOBE
I LLUSTRATOR and C OREL D RAW, then paths will be something very familiar.
Work with paths just like you work with bezier curves. Bezier curves are, as a matter
of fact, paths. You may just not be aware of the power that is hidden within them. The
big difference is that you can edit your curve, you can paint with your curve, or even
save, import, and export the curve.
There are three command areas in the Paths dialog:

• The top edit area

• The path area with its right button popup menu

• The bottom control area

7.2.1 Control area

From left to right we count:

New Path You will create a new path and activate the bezier tool. The
path is named Path#X1 . If you want to rename it, double click on the path in the
path area. A name dialog will appear.

Duplicate Path Will duplicate the active path. To activate a path, single click
on it in the path area. The name is, by default, OldName#X2 .
1
where X is a number
2
where X indicates the nth duplication of the path

50
CHAPTER 7. PATHS 51

Path to Selection Will create a selection out of a path. Notice that the path
doesn’t have to be closed. The created selection will simply join the endpoints
with a line that will follow the curve’s direction in each endpoint.

Selection to Path Will create a path out of a selection. Beware of compli-

cated selections such as selections done by quick mask or select by color. Such
selections will create very complex paths which are hard to control.

Stroke Path Will stroke the path with the brush of the active device. The path
doesn’t have to be closed. The stroke will come from one endpoint to the other.

Delete Path Will delete the active path.

 

No confirmation dialog will appear.

 

7.2.2 Edit area

To edit a path, the bezier tool must be active. If it isn’t, you will not be able to edit a path.
In the top edit area we count from left to right:

New Point This command will add a control point to the path and make a
line from the last control point to the new point. There are two ways to create a
path. You can just click to add a point. This will create a curve with sharp corners.
If instead you click and drag, you will stretch and form the curve related to the
added control point. If you create the path this way, you will end up with a curve
with smooth “corners”. You can, naturally, combine the two ways to create curves.
You close your path by joining the first and last point (this is done by adding the
last point really close to the first point). A square sign will now appear inside the
path. This command will turn the path into a selection. Clicking outside the previ-
ously closed curve will start a new bezier curve. The path to selection command
will now be deactivated and you can add more points inside the previously closed
curve. You can have as many closed curves as you want, but you can only have
one that isn’t closed in the same path. This may look like a limitation, but you can
have as many paths as you like. This will enable you to have as many unclosed
curves as you want, as long as they are in separate paths.

Add Point Will add a point to your curve. The new point must be located
on the curve. You can’t add a point outside the curve. You will notice that your
cursor will have a little + sign when you are over a curve in the image. When the
+ sign appears, it means that you are able to add a point by clicking on the curve.
The new point will be adjusted to fit the curve and the curve’s shape will not be
altered.
CHAPTER 7. PATHS 52

Remove Point Will remove a point in your curve. The point must be be-
tween the endpoints in a non-closed curve. If the curve is closed it can be any
point within the curve. However you always have two points in the curve.

Edit Point Will allow you to adjust the curve. When you click on an anchor
point, two little handles appear. If you pull the
 handles,
 they will change size and
direction and shape a curve. By pressing  Ctrl 
, you can move an anchor point

anyway  you like. To be able to adjust each handle separately, you have to press
Shift .

7.2.3 Path area

The path area is where you choose the path that you want to work with. If you r ight click
on a path, a popup menu will appear with commands for copy, paste etc. Please see 50
for references of those commands. The default name of a path is simple – it’s just Path
followed by a number. It can be useful to change a path’s name. To change its name,
simply double click on the path and a name dialog will appear.

7.3 New Path

Creates a new path named “Path” followed by a number. This function is the same as

clicking the icon.

7.4 Duplicate Path

Creates a copy of the active path and places it above the copied path. The new path
will have “<number>” added to the name of the copied path as its name. This function
is the same as clicking the icon.

7.5 Path to Selection

Selects the area contained within the path. If the path is not closed, it will be completed
and the internal areas selected. If the path is curving, the completing line will be curved.
If it is straight, a straight line will be used to complete the path into the selection. This
function is the same as clicking the icon.

7.6 Stroke Path

Stroke (draw a line) along the currently active path with the current painting tool. The
stroked line is drawn with the center of the paint tool on the center of the path. This
function is the same as clicking the icon.
For example, if the paint tool selected is the the normal “Paintbrush”, this will be
used to create the line. If this tool has any options set, such as using a gradient or
CHAPTER 7. PATHS 53

fading out, this will be honored when the path is stroked. This applies to any of the
modes that the painting tool accepts.
The following paint tools work when stroking a path. They need to be the currently
active tool to work. If no paint tool is selected, then the "Paintbrush" tool is used.

• Pencil

• Paintbrush

• Eraser

• Airbrush

• Clone

• Convolver

• Dodge or Burn

• Smudge

7.7 Delete Path

Deletes the currently active path. The path below it becomes the active path. This
function is the same as clicking the icon.

7.8 Copy Path

Copies the points of the active path to the GIMP clipboard. Use Paste Path to paste
the path points to another image.
 
If you want to copy paths between images then you need to create a new,
empty path in the destination image into which the points from the source
path can be copied.
 

7.9 Paste Path

Pastes a previously copied set of path points into the currently selected path. Use Copy
Path to copy the path points first.
 
If you want to copy paths between images, you need to create a new,
empty path in the destination image into which the points from the source
path can be copied.
 
CHAPTER 7. PATHS 54

7.10 Export Path

Will export the path to a file which can later beimported to another image. It may sound
simple, but it is important. Besides the basic selection-related paths, there is also the
possibility of painting with paths. Storing paths in a path library will make painting with
paths much easier.

7.11 Import Path

Lets you import a path from a file. Please see Export Path.

7.12 Edit Path Attributes

Enables you to rename a path.
CHAPTER8

Tools

8.1 Tools Introduction

This chapter contains descriptions of all GIMP tools.

8.2 Tool Options Dialog

The Tool Options dialog will show the tool options for the active tool. Please see 55
for a complete list of tools and tool options. Depending on if you have global or local
tool options, the Tools Options dialog for each tool can look a bit different. Please
seeInterface Settings.

8.3 Airbrush

8.3.1 Overview

The Airbrush tool replicates a traditional airbrush. This tool is suitable for painting
soft areas of color.

8.3.2 Airbrush Tool Options

Airbrush Settings

Opacity The Opacity slider sets the transparency level for the paint. A higher opacity
setting results in more opaque paint and a lower setting results in more transpar-
ent paint.

Mode The Mode dropdown list provides a selection of paint application modes. A list
of these modes can be found in the glossary.

Incremental The Incremental checkbox actiavtes incremental paint mode for the tool.
More information about incremental mode can be found in the glossary

Rate The Rate slider adjusts the speed of color application that the airbrush paints. A
higher setting will produce darker brush strokes in a shorter amount of time.

55
CHAPTER 8. TOOLS 56

Pressure This slider controls the amount of color that the airbrush paints. A higher
setting here will result in darker strokes.

Additional Information 
Default Keyboard Shortcut: A

Key modifiers:
 
• Ctrl changes the tool to a Color Picker that sets the foreground color.
 
• Alt changes the tool to a Color Picker that sets the background color.
 
• Shift is used to create straight lines.
 
 
• Shift 
Ctrl is used to create straight lines that are constrained to 15 degree
absolute angles.

8.4 Bezier Selection

8.4.1 Overview

The Bezier Selection tool creates selection areas using bezier curves. Bezier
curves are explained in greater detail in the Paths Dialog Help section.

8.4.2 Bezier Selection Tool Options

Bezier Selection Settings

Feather The Feather option sets the amount of selection feathering to create when
rendering the selection. Feathering softens the edge of the selection by the spec-
ified number of pixels. See also:Feather Selection.

Antialiasing The Antialiasing button toggles the rendering of aliased edges on the
selection boundary. Aliasing produces smoother curves and angles and is rec-
ommended for most uses.
See: Anti-aliasing glossary entry

Additional Information 
Default Keyboard Shortcut: B

The key modifier information can be found in the Paths Dialog Help.

8.5 Blend
Gradient blending
CHAPTER 8. TOOLS 57

8.5.1 Overview

The Blend tool renders a gradient based on the current foreground and back-
ground colors. The start and end points are set using the mouse. Simply drag and drop
a line, and the gradient will be rendered using the foreground color as the start and the
background color as the end. The quality of the resulting gradient will depend on the
maximum number of colors available to the blend tool.

8.5.2 Blend Tool Options

Blend Settings

Opacity The Opacity slider sets the transparency level for the blend. A higher opacity
setting results in a more opaque blend and a lower setting results in a more
transparent blend.

Mode The Mode dropdown list provides a selection of blend application modes. A list
of these modes can be found in theglossary.

Offset The Offset slider changes the distance from the start point that the gradient
is rendered. A setting of zero will render the gradient across the entire gradient
area. Higher settings will force the gradient to start rendering at a later point.

Blend • FG to BG (RGB): Renders the gradient in RGB color space.

• FG to BG (HSV): Renders the gradient in HSV color space.
• FG to Transparent: Renders the gradient using the foreground color and
fades that color into transparent over the length of the gradient.
• Custom Gradient: Renders the gradient using the currently selected gradi-
ent.
SeeGradient Selection for further information.

Gradient • Linear : Maps the rendered gradient along a linear path directly from
start to end. This is the default behavior.
• Bi-Linear : Maps the complete gradient along half of the total distance, then
reverses the gradient for the remainder.
• Radial: Maps the gradient in a circle. The start point for the gradient repre-
sents the center of the circle and the end point marks the radius. The colors
are rendered such that the gradient fades from the center of the circle to the
outer edge, from foreground to background.
• Square: Maps the gradient as a square. The gradient will always be ren-
dered as a perfect square with the sides facing left, up, right, and down.
The start point sets the center of the square and the end point sets the
outer edge of the square.
• Conical (symmetric): Creates a gradient that is mapped to a circle. The
gradient is rendered around the start point which represents the anchor
around which the render takes place. The unseen line between the start
and end points sets the start of the gradient. Directly opposite this is where
the gradient is completed and reversed creating a conical effect.
CHAPTER 8. TOOLS 58

• Conical (asymmetric): Creates a gradient similar in detail to the Conical

(symmetric) one, but the gradient is not reversed at the half-way point.
• Shapeburst (angular): Maps the layer or selection shape prior to rendering
the gradient. The resulting blend effect is based on that shape. The start
and end points do not matter.
• Shapeburst (spherical): This method is similar to the Shapeburst (angular)
method except that the shape of the final render is less angular. Start and
end points are inconsequential.
• Shapeburst (dimpled): Again similar to the Shapeburst (angular) method,
but is rendered in a collapsed way. The start and end points do not affect
this technique.
• Spiral (clockwise): This renders a spiral shape in a clockwise direction.
• Spiral (anticlockwise): This renders a spiral shape in an anti-clockwise di-
rection.

Repeat This option is not available for all Gradient settings. It provides three options.

• None: This option renders the gradient normally.

• Sawtooth Wave: This renders the gradient normally, but repeats the gradi-
ent from the start and end points.
• Triangular Wave: This option renders the gradient normally and repeats the
gradient in the same fashion as Sawtooth Wave, but reverses the gradient
for every second iteration.

Additional Information 
Default Keyboard Shortcut: L

Key modifiers:
 
• Ctrl 
is used to constrain the blend angle to increments of 15 degrees.

8.6 Brightness-Contrast

8.6.1 Overview
The Brightness - Contrast tool adjusts the brightness and contrast levels for the active
layer or selection.

8.6.2 Brightness - Contrast Options

Brightness-Contrast Settings

Brightness The Brightness slider sets a positive or negative value for the brightness
of the active selection or layer.

Contrast The Contrast slider sets a positive or negative value for the contrast level of
the active layer or selection.
CHAPTER 8. TOOLS 59

Preview The Preview checkbox toggles the use of a dynamic update of the active layer
or selection. If this option is turned on, any changes made to the Brightness or
Contrast sliders will be seen immediately.

8.7 Bucket Fill

8.7.1 Overview

The Bucket Fill tool is used to fill areas of a layer or selection with either color or
a pattern.

8.7.2 Bucket Fill Tool Options

Bucket Fill Settings

Opacity The Opacity slider sets the transparency level for the fill. A higher opacity set-
ting results in a more opaque fill and a lower setting results in a more transparent
fill.

Mode The Mode dropdown list provides a selection of paint application modes. A list
of these modes can be found in theglossary.

Sample Merged This option toggles the sampling from all layers. If Sample Merged
is active, fills can be made on a lower layer, while the color information used for
threshold checking is located further up. Simply select the lower level and ensure
that a layer above is visible for color weighting.

Threshold The Threshold slider sets the level at which color weights are measured
for fill boundaries. A higher setting will fill more of a multi colored image and
conversely, a lower setting will fill less area.

Fill Type • FG Color Fill: This sets the fill color to the currently selected foreground
color.
• BG Color Fill: This sets the fill color to the currently selected background
color.
• Pattern Fill: This option sets the fill color to the currently selected pattern.
See also: Pattern Selection.

Additional Information  

Default Keyboard Shortcut: 
Shift 
B

Key modifiers:
 
• Ctrl 
toggles the use of BG Color Fill or FG Color Fill on the fly.
CHAPTER 8. TOOLS 60

8.8 By Color Selection

8.8.1 Overview
The Select by Color tool is capable of selecting areas of the current layer using color.
Unlike the Fuzzy Selection Tool , the Select by Color tool will make selections across
the entire layer, not just adjoining areas.

8.8.2 Select by Color Options

There are many options that make Select by Color very powerful. Select by Color
Settings

Selection Preview To the left of the dialog is an area which previews the current se-
lection using black or white. Black areas are unselected and white areas are
selected regions.

Selection Mode There are four selection modes:

• Replace: This mode will create a new selection region with each click in
the image window.
• Add: This mode will add to the current selection with each additional click
in the image window.
• Subtract: This mode removes the newly selected area from the existing
selection area if it exists.
• Intersect: This mode uses logical intersection to determine the resulting
selection area. After clicking in the image window to indicate the new region,
the selection area will be reduced to include only those regions with were
overlapping. That is, where the old selection area and the new selection
area intersected.

Fuzziness Threshold The Fuzziness Threshold slider adjusts the selection threshold.
Higher thresholds result in greater areas being selected with each click.

Selection The three buttons in this section modify the selection area quickly.

• Invert: This button inverts the current selection.

• All: This button selects the entire layer.
• None: This button removes the current selection.

Reset / Close The Reset button resets the selection options to the defaults.
The Close button closes the Select by Color dialog maintaining the selection
area.
CHAPTER 8. TOOLS 61

8.9 Clone

8.9.1 Overview

The Clone tool uses the current brush to copy from a source point. The source
point can be in an image or pattern.

8.9.2 Clone Tool Options

Clone Settings

Opacity The Opacity slider sets the transparency level for the paint. A higher opacity
setting results in more opaque paint and a lower setting results in more transpar-
ent paint.

Mode The Mode dropdown list provides a selection of paint application modes. A list
of these modes can be found in the glossary.

Pressure Sensitivity The Pressure Sensitivity section sets whether opacity, hard-
ness or size will be effected by pressure for input devices that support this option.

Source The image  modeuses an image as a source for cloning. The source point is
set by holding 
Ctrl 
while clicking Button1 in an image at the desired point.
The pattern mode uses the current pattern as the source for cloning. The source
point is the top left corner of the pattern.

Alignment The alignment mode sets how the source position is offset from each brush
stroke.

• The Non Aligned mode takes the offset between the source point and the
start of each new stroke.
• The Aligned mode takes the offset between the source point and the start
of the first stroke, and uses it as the offset for all subsequent strokes.
• The Registered mode has no offset. If the source image is a different size
to the destination image, the two will be aligned at the top left corner.

Additional Information 
Default Keyboard Shortcut: C

Key modifiers:
 
• Ctrl 
sets the point of origin for the tool.

8.10 Color Balance

8.10.1 Overview
The color balance tool modifies the color balance of the active selection or layer.
CHAPTER 8. TOOLS 62

8.10.2 Color Balance Options

Color Balance Settings
Color Levels The Color Levels input boxes provide a manual way of selecting the
RGB weights. The first box corresponds to the Red level, the second to Green,
and the third to Blue.

RGB Sliders The three sliders adjust the color balance interactively.

Shadows, Midtones, and Highlights Selecting one of these options will restrict the
range of colors that are changed with the sliders or input boxes for Red, Green,
and Blue.

Preserve Luminosity This option ensures that the brightness of the active selection or
layer is maintained.

Preview The Preview checkbox toggles dynamic image updating. If this option is on,
any change made to the RGB levels are immediately seen on the active selection
or layer.

8.11 Color Picker

8.11.1 Overview

The Color Picker tool samples a color, displays it along with its hex value, and
optionally changes the current foreground color to match it.

8.11.2 Color Picker Options

Color Picker Settings
Sample Merged This option will allow the color to be sampled from all available layers.
The resulting color will be a composite of all layers, not just the current one.

Sample Average The Sample Average option will take the color sample from a radius
which is set by the slider. The resulting color will be an average of all colors found
by the tool to be inside the radius.

Update Active Color This toggle will activate the capturing of the selected color by the
foreground color well in the Toolbox.
Additional Information 
Default Keyboard Shortcut: O

8.12 Convolver

8.12.1 Overview

The convolve tool uses the current brush to blur or sharpen your image.
See also: Brush Selection.
CHAPTER 8. TOOLS 63

8.12.2 Convolver Options

Convolve Settings

Opacity The Opacity slider sets the transparency level for the operation. A higher
opacity setting results in a more opaque render and a lower setting results in a
more transparent one.

Pressure Sensitivity The Pressure Sensitivity section sets whether hardness, rate
or size will be effected by pressure for input devices that support this option.

Rate The rate slider sets the strength of the convolve effect.

Convolve Type • Blur mode blurs the image colors into each other. The result will
be a smooth transition between colors, but will always be darker than the
original colors.
• Sharpen mode causes neighboring pixels with similar colors to converge.
Used judiciously, blurry edges can be sharpened somewhat, but if applied
repeatedly it can produce unusual results.
See also: Sharpen Filter and Unsharp Mask Filter.

Additional Information 
Default Keyboard Shortcut: V

Key modifiers:
 
• Ctrl will switch between blur and sharpen modes. The mode will remain switched
 
until 
Ctrl  is released.
   
• Shift places the convolve tool into straight line mode. Holding Shift while
clicking Button1 will convolve in a straight line. Consecutive clicks will continue
convolving in straight lines that originate from the end of the last line.

8.13 Crop

8.13.1 Overview

The Crop tool is used to crop or resize the image or the current layer.

8.13.2 Crop Tool Options

Crop Settings

Current Layer only This option forces the Crop and Resize tool to affect the currently
selected layer only. Any cropping or resizing will only affect the current layer.

Allow Enlarging If this toggle is set, any operation that extends beyond the image
boundary will increase the size of the canvas appropriately.
CHAPTER 8. TOOLS 64

Tool Toggle This option will toggle between Crop and Resize. Crop will do exactly
that. It will crop the image to the selected area. Resize will crop the canvas, but
leave the original layer
 sizes
 as they were. This toggle can be switched dynami-
cally by holding the 
Ctrl 
key.

8.13.3 Crop and Resize Information

This dialog becomes available when the cropping region is mapped by clicking and
dragging an area of the image.

Origin, Width, and Height These settings show the origin in X and Y style coordinates
of the cropping selection area, and the Width and Height of the cropping area.
They can be manually changed to provide precise control over the cropping area.

From Selection The From Selection button automatically resizes the crop selection to
encapsulate the current selection area. It will do so in a rectangular fashion. Any
pre-existing selection area is suitable.

Auto Shrink This button when pressed will try to automatically shrink the cropping area
to a heavily color weighted area in the image that is enclosed by the cropping
selection region.

Additional Information  

Default Keyboard Shortcut: 
Shift 
C

Key modifiers:
   
• Ctrl switches the tool toggle between Crop and Resize. Alt toggles the use
of Allow Enlarging as described above.

8.14 Curves

8.14.1 Overview
The Curves tool is used to adjust the relative values of pixels in the active selection or
the active layer. The tool has various options available to help refine these changes.

8.14.2 Curves Tool Options

Curves Tool Settings

Modify Curves for Channel There are four options here.

• Value: Sets the changes to affect all pixel values.

• Red: This setting makes changes to the Red channel only.
• Green: This setting makes changes to the Green channel only.
• Blue: This setting makes changes to the Blue channel only.
Load / Save These buttons allow you to save Curves that you have created. They can
be saved anywhere or with any filename and extension.
CHAPTER 8. TOOLS 65

Curve Type Curve type allows you to choose between Smooth or Free.

• Smooth: This mode constrains the curve type to a smooth line with tension.
This mode provides a more realistic render than Free mode.
• Free: This mode allows free-hand drawing of the curve using yourmouse.
This mode provides more control than the Smooth mode.

Main Editing Area The main editing area of the curves window provides the actual
modification area of the tool. The curve can be changed using themouse.
In Smooth mode, each click adds a node to the curve that can be moved by
clicking and dragging.
In Free mode, the curve must be drawn by hand.

8.15 Dodge or Burn

8.15.1 Overview

The Dodge or Burn tool uses the current brush to lighten or darken the colors in
your image. The mode will determine which type of pixels are effected.

8.15.2 Dodge / Burn Options

Dodge or Burn Settings

Pressure Sensitivity The Pressure Sensitivity section sets whether opacity, hard-
ness or size will be effected by pressure for input devices that support this option.

Exposure The exposure slider sets the strength of the dodge or burn effect.

Type The dodge effect lightens colors.

The burn effect darkens colors.

Mode • The highlights mode restricts the dodge or burn effects to lighter colored
pixels.
• The midtones mode restricts the dodge or burn effects to midtone pixels.
• The shadows mode restricts the dodge or burn effects to darker colored
pixels.

Additional Information  

Shift 
Default Keyboard Shortcut:  D

Key modifiers:
 
• Ctrl 
will switch dodge/burn mode. The mode will change back when Button1 is
released.
   
• Shift places the dodge or burn tool into straight line mode. Holding Shift 
while clicking Button1 will dodge or burn in a straight line. Consecutive clicks will
continue to dodge or burn in straight lines that originate from the end of the last
line.
CHAPTER 8. TOOLS 66

   
• Ctrl 
Shift places the tool into straight line mode and constrains the angle of
the created lines to 15 degrees.

8.16 Elliptical Selection

8.16.1 Overview

Elliptical Selection creates circular selection areas. The Selection is constructed

by clicking and dragging over the area that is to be selected.

8.16.2 Elliptical Selection Options

Elliptical Selection Settings
Feather The Feather slider sets the amount of feathering to create around the ren-
dered selection area. Feathering softens the edge of the selection by the speci-
fied number of pixels. See also:Feather Selection.

Antialiasing The Antialiasing button toggles the rendering of aliased edges on the
selection boundary. Antialiasing produces smoother curves and angles and is
recommended for most uses.

Fixed Size / Aspect Ratio The Fixed Size / Aspect Ratio option allows more con-
trolled creation of the selection region. By setting the size to the desired amount,
predetermined areas can be selected with ease. The area can also be specified
as a percentage of the total layer.
Additional Information 
Default Keyboard Shortcut: E

Key modifiers:
 
• The Ctrl key is used to subtract from existing selections and constrain the origin
of the selectionsuchthat the initial click determines the center of the selection.
Simply release  Ctrl 
prior to releasing Button1 if non constrained selection sub-
traction is required.
 
• Alt 
is used to move an existing selection.
 
• Shift is used to add to existing selections or to constrain the selection shape
such that the height and width
 remain
 equal. If needs require addition without
constraint, simply release 
Shift  prior to releasing Button1.
  

• Shift 
Ctrl can be used to constrain the selection generation to equal height
and width, as well as forcing the selection to generate from the point first clicked.
It also serves the purpose of intersection selections.
 
When moving selections beyond the boundaries of the image, the selection
area will be cropped to the image area. Selections cannot exist outside
image areas. Selection movements and changes are kept in the undo
history just in case.
 
CHAPTER 8. TOOLS 67

8.17 Eraser

8.17.1 Overview

The Eraser is used to remove blocks of color from the current layer, selection, or
image. If the Eraser is used on on the Background layer, the eraser will remove color
areas and replace them with the current background color. If used on a normal floating
layer, the color will be replaced with transparency. The same rules apply to non-alpha
images.

8.17.2 Eraser Tool Options

Eraser Settings

Incremental The Incremental checkbox actiavtes incremental paint mode for the tool.
More information about incremental mode can be found in theglossary

Pressure Sensitivity The Pressure Sensitivity section sets the sensitivity levels for in-
put devices that support this option.

Hard Edge By default the Eraser tool softens the edges of and area erased. The Hard
Edge toggle changes this behavior. Any area erased while this option is active
will be erased with no softening of the edge of the brush used.

Anti Erase The Anti Erase function of the Erase tool can un-erase areas of an image.
This feature only works when used on images with an alpha channel.

Additional Information  

Default Keyboard Shortcut: 
Shift 
E

Key modifiers:
 
• Ctrl toggles between Anti Erase and normal erase modes.
 
• Alt is used to create straight lines.
   
• Alt 
Ctrl is used to create straight lines that are constrained to 15 degree abso-
lute angles.

8.18 Flip

8.18.1 Overview

The Flip tool provides the ability to flip layers or selections either horizontally or
vertically.
 

When flipping selections, a new layer will be created and the old layer that
the selection was created on will have that area “cut” from it.
 
CHAPTER 8. TOOLS 68

8.18.2 Flip Tool Options

Flip Tool Settings

Tool Toggle The T ool Toggle settings control flipping in either a Horizontal direction
or a Vertical one. This toggle can also be switched using a key modification.

Additional Information  

Default Keyboard Shortcut: 
Shift 
F

Key modifiers:
 
• Ctrl 
toggles the flip direction.

8.19 Free-Hand Selection

8.19.1 Overview

Free-Hand Selection allows hand drawn selection areas. Simply click and drag
with Button1 to create a free-hand selection area.

8.19.2 Free-Hand Selection Tool Options

Free-Hand Selection Settings

Feather The Feather slider sets the amount of feathering to create around the ren-
dered selection area. Feathering softens the edge of the selection by the speci-
fied number of pixels. See also: Feather Selection.

Antialiasing The Antialiasing button toggles the rendering of aliased edges on the
selection boundary. Aliasing produces smoother curves and angles and is rec-
ommended for most uses.

Additional Information 
Default Keyboard Shortcut: F

Key modifiers:
 
• Ctrl is used to subtract from existing selections.
 
• Alt is used to move an existing selection.
 
• Shift  is used to add to existing selections.
  

• Shift Ctrl is used to produce selection intersections. This is also known as
union selections.
 
When moving selections beyond the boundaries of the image, the selection
area will be cropped to the image area. Selections cannot exist outside
image areas. Selection movements and changes are kept in the undo
history just in case.
 
CHAPTER 8. TOOLS 69

8.20 Fuzzy Selection

Magic Wand

8.20.1 Overview

The Fuzzy Selection tool is used to select contiguous regions of similar color
weight.

8.20.2 Fuzzy Selection Tool Options

Fuzzy Selection Settings

Feather The Feather slider sets the amount of feathering to create around the ren-
dered selection area. Feathering softens the edge of the selection by the speci-
fied number of pixels. See also:Feather Selection.

Antialiasing The Antialiasing button toggles the rendering of aliased edges on the
selection boundary. Aliasing produces smoother curves and angles and is rec-
ommended for most uses.
See: Anti-aliasing glossary entry

Sample Merged Sample merging takes the information needed for the operation from
the sub-pixel layer of the image.
See: Sample merge glossary entry

Threshold This slider changes the threshold of the selection area. A higher setting will
cause more areas to selected. A lower one will decrease the final selection area.
This setting can be adjusted dynamically by holding Button1 while making the
selection. Moving the pointer up will dynamically decrease the Threshold slider
and moving the pointer down will increase the Threshold slider.

Additional Information 
Default Keyboard Shortcut: B

Key modifiers:
 
• Ctrl is used to subtract from existing selections.
 
• Alt is used to move an existing selection.
 
• Shift  is used to add to existing selections.
  

• Shift Ctrl is used to produce selection intersections. This is also known as a
union selection.
 
When moving selections beyond the boundaries of the image, the selection
area will be cropped to the image area. Selections cannot exist outside
image areas. Selection movements and changes are kept in the undo
history just in case.
 
CHAPTER 8. TOOLS 70

8.21 Histogram

8.21.1 Overview
The Histogram tool displays detailed pixel intensity information about the image or a
channel.
The main area of the Histogram window is the graphical representation of the in-
tensity levels across the entire luminosity range for the image. Ranges can be selected
with themouse by clicking and dragging the range from within the histogram.

8.21.2 Histogram Tools Options

Histogram Tool Settings

Information on Channel The Information on Channel button allows the selection of a

specific color channel to show information about.

• Value: Displays pixel intensity information for all channels.

• Red: Displays intensity information about the Red channel only.
• Green: This option ensures that only Green channel information is shown.
• Blue: This setting displays only the information regarding the Blue channel.

Mean Mean shows the average intensity of the selected range of pixels.

Standard Deviation The Std Dev label shows the difference of the square root of the
squared sums of all the selected data points from the Mean.

Median The Median value represents the middle value of the selected range.

Pixels The Pixels value is the total number of pixels counted in the image. It is equal
to width multiplied by height.

Intensity Intensity displays the intensity for the selected range of values.

Count Count shows the number of pixels that have been selected within the selected
range of intensity levels.

Percentile The Percentile count indicates the percentage of pixels that are currently
inside the selected range.

8.22 Hue-Saturation

8.22.1 Overview
The Hue-Saturation tool is used to adjust hue, saturation, and lightness levels on a
range of color weights for the selected area or active layer.
CHAPTER 8. TOOLS 71

8.22.2 Hue-Saturation Options

The Hue-Saturation dialog window allows the selection of the color range that will be
affected by the sliders. The colors are listed on the left side of the dialog and can be
selected individually for tighter control or globally using Master for changes that will
affect all pixels. Hue-Saturation Settings

Hue The Hue slider changes the hue of the selected pixel color.

Lightness The Lightness slider changes the lightness of the selected pixel color.

Saturation The Saturation slider changes the saturation levels of the selected pixel
color.

Preview The Preview button toggles the dynamic update of the image window when
changes are made to the levels.

8.23 Ink

8.23.1 Overview

The Ink tool paints solid brush strokes with an anti-aliased edge. The size, shape
and angle of the brush can be set to determine how the strokes will be rendered.

8.23.2 Ink Tool Options

Ink Settings

Adjustment The Size slider sets the maximum size of the brush strokes.
The Angle slider sets the degree to which the brush shape is rotated from the
direction of the stroke tilt. Positive values correspond to clockwise rotations. This
has no effect for input devices without tilt sensitivity.

Sensitivity The Size and Tilt settings do not affect input devices that do not support
sensitivity controls.

• The Size slider sets how sensitive the brush size is to the pressure of a
stroke.
• The T ilt slider sets how sensitive the brush shape is to the tilt of a stroke.
• The Speed slider sets how sensitive the brush size is to the speed of a
stroke. Faster strokes will result in a narrower line.

Type The brush type can be set to a Circle, Square, or Diamond.

Shape The shape of the brush can be changed by dragging the central button. The
shape produced is equivalent to a brush that tilts from the middle toward the
button.

Additional Information 
Default Keyboard Shortcut: K

CHAPTER 8. TOOLS 72

8.24 Intelligent Scissors

8.24.1 Overview

The Intelligent Scissors can be used to select contiguous areas of similar color
weight in a fashion similar to the Fuzzy Selection Tool. The primary difference is that
the scissor tool creates the selection area one line at a time. Clicking with Button1 will
create nodes that are intelligently joined using lines that attempt to follow color weights.
Once the area is closed, clicking inside the new area will render the selection area. It is
at this time that the key modifications can be used to change the selection method.
See Also:Paths Dialog Help for additional help with path style area creation.

8.24.2 Intelligent Scissors Options

Intelligent Scissor Settings

Feather The Feather slider sets the amount of feathering to create around the ren-
dered selection area. Feathering softens the edge of the selection by the speci-
fied number of pixels. See also:Feather Selection.

Antialiasing The Antialiasing button toggles the rendering of aliased edges on the
selection boundary. Aliasing produces smoother curves and angles and is rec-
ommended for most uses.

Additional Information 
Default Keyboard Shortcut: I

Key modifiers:
 
• Ctrl 
is used to subtract from existing selections.
 
• Shift is used to add to existing selections.
   
• Ctrl 
Shift is used to produce selection intersections. This is also known as
union selections.

8.25 Levels

8.25.1 Overview
The Levels tools provides similar features to theHistogram tool but can also change the
intensity range of the active layer or selection.

8.25.2 Levels Tool Options

The Levels tool contains a visual graph of the intensity values of the active layer or
selection. Below the graph are three Arrow-heads that can be clicked and dragged
to constrain and change the intensity level for the active layer or selection. The black
Arrow-head represents the dark areas and similarly, the white Arrow-head represents
the light areas. Levels Tool Settings
CHAPTER 8. TOOLS 73

Modify Levels for Channel The Modify Levels for Channel button allows the selection
of the specific channel that will be modified by the tool.

• Value: This option makes intensity changes against all pixels in the image.
• Red: This option makes changes to he Red channel only.
• Green: This option makes changes to the Green channel only.
• Blue: This option makes changes to the Blue channel only.

Input Levels The Input Levels input boxes allow manual levels to be selected for each
of the ranges.

Output Levels Output Levels allows manual selection of a constrained output level
range. There are also Arrow-heads located here that can be used to interactively
change the Output Levels.

Auto This button performs an automatic setting of the levels based on the pixel inten-
sities of the image.

Save / Load The Save and Load buttons are used to do just that. Any Levels that you
have set can be saved to the filesystem and loaded later.

Preview The Preview button makes all changes to the levels dynamically so that new
Levels settings can be viewed straight away.

8.26 Magnify

8.26.1 Overview

The Magnify tool is used tozoom

in or out of an image. By default the tool will
zoom in when clicked. By holding 
Ctrl 
this behavior can be changed to zooming out.

8.26.2 Magnify Tool Options

Magnify Settings

Allow Window Resizing This option toggles whether or not the image view window will
resize to match the new image magnification level. When this option is not set,
the window will remain at it’s current size regardless of the magnification level.

Tool Toggle The T ool Toggle section can be used to manually toggle between zooming
in or zooming out of the image.

Additional Information  

Shift 
Default Keyboard Shortcut:  M

Key modifiers:
 
• Ctrl 
toggles between zooming in or zooming out.
CHAPTER 8. TOOLS 74

8.27 Measure

8.27.1 Overview

The Measure tool displays the distance and bearing between two points in your
image.
To measure, click and drag using Button1 between two points. Each point can be
dragged to a new position.

8.27.2 Measure Tool Options

Measure Tool Settings

Use Info Window The Use Info Window checkbox will toggle the sending of informa-
tion to the Info Window Dialog.

Additional Information
Key modifiers:
 
• Ctrl is used to constrain the end points to a horizontal line.
 
• Alt is used to constrain the end points to a vertical line.
   
• Ctrl 
Alt is used to constrain the endpoints to a 45 degree diagonal line.

8.28 Move

8.28.1 Overview

The Move tool is used to move layers or selections. Moving layers is a simple
procedure. Merely click with Button1 and drag the layer you wish to move. If a layer can
be seen underneath the active one, ensure the correct layer is moved. The pointer will
by default indicate what will be moved.
The move tool can also be used to “nudge” the current layer in one pixel increments.
To do so, select the layer
that will be
 “nudged”, focus the image window, and use the
Numlock 
arrow keys. Ensure that  is not turned on. Additional Information

Default Keyboard Shortcut: M

Key modifiers:
 
• Alt 
will move any available selection.
 
• Shift 
will move the currently selected layer regardless of which layer is visible.

8.29 Paintbrush
Straight Line Tools
CHAPTER 8. TOOLS 75

8.29.1 Overview

The paintbrush tool paints fuzzy brush strokes. All strokes are rendered using
the current brush.
See also: Brush Selection.

8.29.2 Paintbrush Options

Paintbrush Settings

Opacity The Opacity slider sets the transparency level for the paint. A higher opacity
setting results in more opaque paint and a lower setting results in more transpar-
ent paint.

Mode The Mode dropdown list provides a selection of paint application modes. A list
of these modes can be found in the glossary.

Incremental The Incremental checkbox actiavtes incremental paint mode for the tool.
More information about incremental mode can be found in the glossary

Pressure Sensitivity The Pressure Sensitivity section sets the sensitivity levels for in-
put devices that support this option.

Fade Out This option sets the stroke to fade out after the specified distance. The stroke
will fade to transparency at the completion of the set distance.

Gradient The Gradient setting toggles the use of the currently selected gradient in
stead of the current foreground color. There are four ways that the gradient can
be rendered.

• Once Forward: Renders the gradient once during the stroke. It is painted
in a forward direction. The entire color sequence of the gradient will be
rendered within the distance set.
• Once Backward: Renders the gradient once during the stroke. It is painted
in a reverse order of colors. The entire color sequence of the gradient will
be rendered within the distance set.
• Loop Sawtooth: Renders the gradient repeatedly. At each expiry of the
distance that has been set, the gradient will begin rerendering from the be-
ginning.
• Loop Triangle: Renders the gradient repeatedly. At each expiry of the
distance that has been set, the gradient will reverse direction and render in
that direction until the expiry of the distance once more. At this point, it will
begin again until the stroke is complete.

Additional Information 
Default Keyboard Shortcut: P

Key modifiers:
 
• Ctrl 
changes the paintbrush to a Color Picker that will set the foreground color.
CHAPTER 8. TOOLS 76

 
• Alt 
changes the paintbrush to a Color Picker that will set the background color.
   
• Shift places the paintbrush tool into straight line mode. Holding Shift while
clicking Button1 will generate a straight line. Consecutive clicks will continue
drawing straight lines that originate from the end of the last line.

8.30 Pencil
Straight Line Tools

8.30.1 Overview

The Pencil tool is used to draw free hand lines with a hard edge. Any strokes are
rendered using the current brush.
See also: Brush Selection.

8.30.2 Pencil Tool Options

Pencil Settings

Opacity The Opacity slider sets the transparency level for the paint. A higher opacity
setting results in more opaque paint and a lower setting results in more transpar-
ent paint.

Mode The Mode dropdown list provides a selection of paint application modes. A list
of these modes can be found in the glossary.

Incremental The Incremental checkbox actiavtes incremental paint mode for the tool.
More information about incremental mode can be found in the glossary

Pressure Sensitivity The Pressure Sensitivity section sets the sensitivity levels for in-
put devices that support this option.

Additional Information  

Shift 
Default Keyboard Shortcut:  P

Key modifiers:
 
• Ctrl changes the pencil to a Color Picker that will set the foreground color.
 
• Alt changes the pencil to a Color Picker that will set the background color.
   
• Shift places the pencil tool into straight line mode. Holding Shift 
while clicking
Button1 will generate a straight line. Consecutive clicks will continue drawing
straight lines that originate from the and of the last line.
CHAPTER 8. TOOLS 77

8.31 Posterize

8.31.1 Overview
The Posterize tool is designed to intelligently weigh the pixel colors of the selected area
or active layer and reduce the number of colors while maintaining a semblance of the
original image characteristics.

8.31.2 Posterize Tool Options

Posterize Tool Settings

Posterize Levels The number of levels used here represents the number of colors that
the tools will use to describe the active layer or selection. This number does not
include black and white.

Preview The Preview toggle allows the dynamic updating of the active layer or selec-
tion when changes are made to the Posterize Levels.

8.32 Rectangular Selection

8.32.1 Overview

The Rectangular Selection tool allows selection areas of a rectangular shapes to

be defined.

8.32.2 Rectangular Selection Tool Options

Rectangular Selection Settings

Feather The Feather slider sets the amount of feathering to create around the ren-
dered selection area. Feathering softens the edge of the selection by the speci-
fied number of pixels. See also:Feather Selection.

Antialiasing The Antialiasing button toggles the rendering of aliased edges on the
selection boundary. Antialiasing produces smoother curves and angles and is
recommended for most uses.

Fixed Size / Aspect Ratio The Fixed Size / Aspect Ratio option allows more con-
trolled creation of the selection region. By setting the size to the desired amount,
predetermined areas can be selected with ease. The area can also be specified
as a percentage of the total layer.

Additional Information 
Default Keyboard Shortcut: R

Key modifiers:
CHAPTER 8. TOOLS 78

 
• Ctrl is used to subtract from existing selections and constrain the origin of the
selectionsuchthat the initial click determines the center of the selection. Simply
release  Ctrl 
prior to releasing Button1 if non constrained selection subtraction
is required.
 
• Alt 
is used to move an existing selection.
 
• Shift is used to add to existing selections or to constrain the selection shape
such that the height and width
 remain
 equal. If needs require addition without
constraint, simply release 
Shift  prior to releasing Button1.
 
 
• Shift 
Ctrl can be used to constrain the selection generation to equal height
and width, as well as forcing the selection to generate from the point first clicked.
It also serves the purpose of intersection selections.
 
When moving selections beyond the boundaries of the image, the selection
area will be cropped to the image area. Selections cannot exist outside
image areas. Selection movements and changes are kept in the undo
history just in case.
 

8.33 Smudge

8.33.1 Overview

The smudge tool uses the current brush to smudge colors on the active layer.

8.33.2 Smudge Tool Options

Smudge Settings

Opacity The Opacity slider sets the transparency level for the paint. A higher opacity
setting results in more opaque paint and a lower setting results in more transpar-
ent paint.

Pressure Sensitivity The Pressure Sensitivity section sets whether hardness or rate
will be effected by pressure for input devices that support this option.

Rate The rate slider sets the strength of the smudge effect.

Additional Information  

Default Keyboard Shortcut: 
Shift 
S

Key modifiers:
   
• The Shift key places the smudge tool into straight line mode. Holding Shift 
while clicking Button1 will smudge in a straight line. Consecutive clicks will con-
tinue smudging in straight lines that originate from the end of the last line.
CHAPTER 8. TOOLS 79

8.34 Text Tool

8.34.1 Overview

The Text tool places rendered text as a new selection. Prior to clicking on the
image, the standard GTK font chooser will be displayed. The font that will be used for
rendering can be selected from this dialog.

8.34.2 Text Tool Options

Text Settings

Antialiasing Antialiasing will render the text with much smoother edges and curves.
This is achieved by slight blurring and merging of the edges. This option can
radically improve the visual appearance of the rendered typeface. Caution should
be exercised when using antialiasing on images that are not in RGB color space.

Border The Border option allows a transparent border to be placed around the ren-
dered text. Normally text is rendered with no space between the text and the
layer or selection edge. This option changes that. The number selected here
represents the number of pixels to surround the image with.

Use Dynamic Text This option will display theDynamic Text Dialog in stead of the stan-
dard GTK font selection dialog.

Additional Information 
Default Keyboard Shortcut: T

8.35 Threshold

8.35.1 Overview
The T hreshold tool allows controlled color conversion and reduction of the active layer
or selection. It will reduce the image to black and white only.

8.35.2 Threshold Tool Options

The T hreshold tool provides a visual graph of the intensity values of the active layer or
selection. Specific areas can be targeted as the base from which to take the information
from which to build the black and white representation. The intensity range can be
interactively selected by clicking Button1 and dragging. Threshold Settings

Threshold Range The Threshold Range input boxes allow manual selection of the
upper and lower intensity ranges.

Preview The Preview toggle allows the dynamic updating of the active layer or selec-
tion while changes are made to the intensity level range.
CHAPTER 8. TOOLS 80

8.36 Transform Tools

8.36.1 Overview

The Transform tool is used to modify the active selection or layer in one of four
ways.

8.36.2 Transform Tool Options

Transform Settings

Transform The T ransform section of the T ransform Tool Options allows the selection
of type of transform that will be applied. Modes

Rotation This mode rotates the layer or selection. See: Rotation.

Scaling This mode scales the active layer or selection. See: Scaling.
Shearing This mode shears the active layer or selection. See: Shearing.
Perspective This mode changes the perspective of the active layer or selection.
See: Perspective

Tool Paradigm There are two settings here. The first, Traditional, is the default ren-
dering mechanism for the transform tool and will render the transform normally.
The second, Corrective, renders the transform in reverse.

Grid Settings The Show Grid checkbox toggles the visibility of the grid during the
transform.
The Density input box changes the number of grid divisions within the transform
grid.

Smoothing The Smoothing checkbox toggles the smoothing of the resulting transfor-
mation. This has no effect on indexed images.

Clip Result The Clip Result checkbox will clip any area of the final render to the edges
of the original area.

8.36.3 Rotation
Rotation mode performs arbitrary rotations to the active layer or selection. To perform
a rotation,
 clickthe
 area that will
 be rotated. Using themouse to click and drag, or
the up arrow  / down arrow  , rotate the displayed grid or box to the required angle.
Finalize the change by clicking Rotate in the Rotation Information window.
The Rotation Information window displays the current rotation information for the
selection or layer. Rotation Information

Angle Angle displays the current angle of the active rotation. It also allows the entry
of numeric data for manual angle entry. There is also a slider that can be used
to accomplish this.
CHAPTER 8. TOOLS 81

Center Center X displays or sets the X-axis for the rotation axis point. The axis can
be moved with themouse by clicking and dragging. Center Y displays or sets
the Y-axis for the rotation axis point. The axis can be moved with themouse by
clicking and dragging.

Rotate The Rotate button tells the tool to perform the rotation.

Reset The Reset button resets the rotation settings to the original values. That is,
those values that were present prior to modification.
 
Key modifiers • Ctrl 
constrains the rotation angle to 15 degree increments.

8.36.4 Scaling
The Scaling transform mode is used to scale the active layer or selection. This is
achieved by clicking the area and dragging with themouse.
Changes are finalized by clicking Scale in the Scaling Information window. Scaling
Information
Original Width / Height This area located at the top of the Scaling Information window
shows the height and width of the original layer or selection.

Current Width The Current Width displays or sets the width of the scaled region.

Current Height The Current Height displays or sets the height of the scaled region.

Scale Ratio Scale Ratio X and Scale Ratio Y display the ratio of the active region in
comparison to the original layer or selection. This is useful for maintaining the
aspect ratio for the resulting layer or selection.

Scale The Scale button tells the transform tool to actually perform the scaling opera-
tion.

Reset The Reset button resets all changed values to their previous settings.
 
Key modifiers • Ctrl constrains the horizontal aspect.
 
• Alt constrains the vertical aspect.
   
• Ctrl 
Alt 
constrains both the horizontal and vertical aspects.

8.36.5 Shearing
The Shearing tool is used to shear a layer or selection, vertically or horizontally. To
shear simply click the layer or selection and drag themouse cursor vertically or horizon-
tally. Shear Information
Shear Magnitude The Shear Magnitude X and Shear Magnitude Y input boxes dis-
play the vertical (Y) or horizontal (X) magnitude of the current shear. The magni-
tude can also be manually entered here.

Shear The Shear button tells the tool to perform the current shearing operation.

Reset The Reset button resets the shearing magnitudes to zero.

CHAPTER 8. TOOLS 82

8.36.6 Perspective
The Perspective tool changes the visual perspective angles of the current layer or
selection. Perspective can be altered for each of the four corners of the area. Simply
click and drag the corner grid to the required location. Perspective Information

Matrix The Matrix information describes the Perspective transformation using matrix
based mathematics.

Transform The Transform button tells the tool to perform the Perspective adjustments.

Reset The Reset button will reset the Perspective settings to the original layer or
selection values.

Additional Information  

Default Keyboard Shortcut: 
Shift 
T

CHAPTER9

File

9.1 File Operations Introduction

This chapter will explain how you can save your work as files and load it again later.
For a list of file formats which The GIMP supports, see 20.

9.2 New Image

File New will create a new image in either RGB (color) or grayscale mode. You can’t
create an indexed image since GIMP will not know which colors your palette should
have. Working in indexed mode is usually not a good choice. Instead work in RGB and
convert to indexed just before saving the image.
How to create a new image:

Set the resolution The resolution is the number of pixels per unit. The default 72dpi
(72 pixels/inch) is good if you want to create web graphics (you can alter the
default value in the Preferences dialog). However if you are going to print your
image, you will probably need a lot more than 72dpi. You have several choices
about how you want to measure the resolution – pixels per inch, mm, points or
picas (there is also an option which will bring up a dialog with even more choices).
We suggest that you stick to ppi since that the most common format when you
are dealing with images. You can have different X and Y resolutions by unlinking
the chain, but that is not recommended.

Set the size You have two options: either you can set it directly in pixels in the top
frame or in a real world unit in the middle frame. If you are working with web
graphics we suggest that you deal with pixels directly. If you are going to print
your image, then setting in a real world unit is the preferred.

Set the mode/type of image Set the mode to either RGB or Grayscale.

Set fill type F oreground takes the current foreground color from the toolbox. Background
takes the current background color from the toolbox. White sets the fill color to
white no matter what the toolbox colors are. Transparent prevents the image from
filling. Instead you will get a totally “empty” image to start.

83
CHAPTER 9. FILE 84

The Reset button resets all values to their default values. OK creates a new
image. Additional Information  

Default Keyboard Shortcut: 
Ctrl 
N

9.3 Open File

Open dialog is where you can load images into GIMP for viewing or editing. The left
hand window shows the directories and the right hand window shows the files in the
selected directory. To open a file, select it in the files listing then choose the correct file
type. If the file has an extension which defines its filetype (such as .xcf) you can select
Automatic and GIMP will open the file in that format. Alternatively, you can force GIMP
to open the file as a specific format by choosing one of the other options in the drop
down list.
Some images have a preview associated with them so you can see what the image
is before opening it. This is particularly useful for larger images where opening the full
image will take a while. If an image doesn’t have a preview, you can click Generate
Preview to create one. This preview image is stored in a sub-directory of the current
one called .xvpics. This preview image will be used in the future when using the open
dialog. Clicking OK opens the image with the selected settings; Cancel aborts.
A useful feature of the Load Image dialog isautocompletion
 of file names. Type the
first few letters of the file name and press the Tab  key. GIMP will then complete as
much of the file name as is uniquely defined by what has already been typed. The right
side of the dialog will display all files
 that
 match the letters in the selection box. You can
Tab 
then type more letters and press  again to update the window.
 
You can load multiple images by pressing 
Shift 
and clicking on each file you want
to open. Additional Information  

Default Keyboard Shortcut: Ctrl 
O

9.4 File Save or Save As

File Save lets you save your file either by its extension e.g. save a file.xcf as an XCF
image. The XCF file format is GIMP’s native file format and is the preferred format to
save all your images in.
 
You can of course save as TIFF, JPEG, or one of the other available
formats, but all the specific GIMP image information will be lost (i.e. the
information about layers, channels, parasites, selections, etc).
 
See also: XCF
When you save an image in a non- GIMP format (i.e. not as a XCF or XJT image)
you could be asked to export it. By exporting it, you will be sure of getting all the visual
image information saved in the non-native format (exporting will, for example, flatten an
image to be saved as .jpg). Ignoring the suggestion to export runs the risk of losing
valuable image information such as nonactive layers.
CHAPTER 9. FILE 85

The Save dialog

 works
 like any other file dialog, but you also have two means of
fast navigation. 
TAB 
completion, if you have a directory /gimp and the Save dialog is
 
currently with in the /home/gimp directly. Then you only have to type /gi and hit 
TAB 
 
and the name will be completed (it works just like 
TAB  completion in the BASH or TSH
 
shells in UNIX or if you have turned it on as  TAB  completion in the CMS in NT). You
also have a drop down directory menu which will enable you to quickly move up in the
directory hierarchy.
You can also create directories and delete or rename files in the Save dialog. Some-
times it is necessary to step up and down once in the directory hierarchy before GIMP
will be able to see the new directory. 
 Additional
 Information
Default Keyboard Shortcut:  Ctrl S


9.5 Revert
Our apologies
Sorry, but the help page for this item is not written yet. Can I help?
Yes you can! Please send a message to [email protected] with revert as the sub-
ject line. Feel free to also include documentation related suggestions or fix requests.

9.6 Last Opened

In The GIMP’s File menu under theToolBox, you will find a list of recently opened files
above the Quit entry. You can click any these entries to open the listed file.
 

You can configure how many entries are shown here in the Interface sec-
tion of Preferences. Setting this to zero turns the list off entirely.
 
 
The list of recently opened files contains the first entries of yourDocument
Index. Look there if you want to see the list off all files you opened since
you installed The GIMP.
 
Additional Information    
Ctrl 
Default Keyboard Shortcut:  <n> (where<n> opens the<n>-th image in the
list of recently opened files).

9.7 Close
Closes the active image window. If changes have been made to the image, GIMP will
ask you whether you are sure you want to continue – click Close in the popup dialog
to continue, or Cancel to leave 
the image
 open. Additional Information

Ctrl 
Default Keyboard Shortcut:  W 
CHAPTER 9. FILE 86

9.8 Quit
The Quit entry on both the Toolbox and image File menus closes all open images and
exits GIMP. If any images are unsaved, GIMP will prompt you – click Quit to continue
or Cancel to leave GIMP and all images
 open. Additional Information

Default Keyboard Shortcut: 
Ctrl 
Q

9.9 Really Close

Confirmation dialog for closing an image that has unsaved changes. If you click Close,
the image will close and all unsaved changes will be lost.

9.10 Really Quit

Confirmation dialog for quitting GIMP with unsaved changes in one or more images.
Clicking Quit will quit and all unsaved changes will be lost.
CHAPTER10

Open

10.1 Opening Images

To open images in The GIMP, use theFile Open dialog.
See 20.

10.2 Open by Extension

When you choose Open from either the Image or ToolBox File menus, you can select
how GIMP opens files in “ Determine File Type”. You can either select a specific format
so GIMP will open all files regardless, of their extension, in that format or you can select
“ Automatic” which opens the file in whatever format corresponds to the file’s extension.

87
CHAPTER11

Save

11.1 Saving Images

To save your images to disk, use theFile Save dialog.
See 20.

11.2 Save by Extension

When saving a file using the File> Save As... menu entry, you can either select a
particular file format in “ Save Options”, or you can choose “ Save by Extension”.
This simply means that GIMP will save the file using whatever format relates to the
extension that has been given to the filename – for example, typing foo.jpg would
save the file as a JPEG.

88
CHAPTER12

Dialogs

12.1 Dialogs Introduction

This chapter contains descriptions of all GIMP dialogs.

12.2 Layers, Channels and Paths Dialog

The Layers, Channels and Paths dialog is an “auto switching dialog”, which means that
the current image is the one shown in the tab folders of the dialog. You can turn off
Auto and choose another opened image in the Image drop down menu.
Please see each tab’s help page for help about

• The Layers Dialogs

• The Channels Dialog

• The Paths Dialogs.

Additional Information   
Default Keyboard Shortcut: 
Ctrl 
L

12.3 The Preferences Dialog

In the Preferences Dialog you will set nearly all adjustable values in The GIMP. Some
additional preference values are still only available in the gimprc file in your personal
GIMP directory. For further information about such values, consult your system wide
gimprc file usually located in /usr/local/etc/gimp/1.2.
There are several categories that you can adjust.New File which controls the default
values for creation of a new file and the comment which is attached to new images by
default.Display which controls transparency type and and 8-Bit display settings.Interface
which controls preview, navigation, help, image window, and tool options.Environment
which controls memory usage, file saving, and scaling.Session which controls the ses-
sion management in GIMP.Monitor which allows for configuration of your monitor reso-
lution.Directories which controls where GIMP loads additional resources such as plug-
ins, scripts, patterns. It also controls where GIMP’s swap file is located. The swap file
location is very important for GIMP’s performance.

89
CHAPTER 12. DIALOGS 90

12.4 New File Settings

12.4.1 Default Image Size and Unit

The top fields will allow you to set the size in pixels and the bottom field will allow you
to set the size in an arbitrary length unit. The difference between the two of them is
that if you specify the the size in e.g. inches then the size in pixels is dependent of the
image resolution. I.e. if you decrease the default resolution, you will decrease the size
in pixels, but not the real size.

12.4.2 Default Image Resolution and Resolution Unit

Let you set the default image resolution and resolution unit. The default image resolution
is internally always measured in dpi (ppi) while The GIMP lets you choose the resolution
unit you will see in dialogs.

12.4.3 Default Image Type

Lets you set what type of image you want to create by default (either RGB or Grayscale).

12.4.4 Maximum Image Size

GIMP will warn you if you try to create images larger than this value.

12.4.5 Summary
Does the size& unit contra resolution image/unit sound a bit complicated and hard to
understand? Let us give you an example. You are familiar with the metric system, but,
like most designers, you are more familiar with a resolution based on pixels per inch
(ppi or dpi). Then you have to set image unit to millimeters (or centimeters), while you
will set the resolution unit to pixels/inch. This will give you the comfort of working with
two familiar units – in this case size measured in the metric system and resolution
measured in ppi.

12.4.6 Default Comment

Lets you enter a text which will be attached and saved as comment with many file
formats. This can be editted on save.

12.5 Display Settings

12.5.1 Transparency
Transparency Type

By default GIMP has a checkerboard pattern built up of mid-tone gray checks. You can,
however, change that in the drop down menu.
CHAPTER 12. DIALOGS 91

 

The white, black and gray only options disable checks and the trans-
parency will be shown as a solid black, white, or gray color.

 

Check Size

Sets the size of the checks in the pattern that indicates transparency.
 

If you have set the check type to white, gray, or black only, then the size
will have no effect what so ever.
 

12.5.2 8-Bit Displays

Install Colormap

If you are working on an 8-Bit display, the GdkRGB subsystem of GDK will automatically
figure out if it needs to install its own colormap or not. Since GIMP’s plug-ins are all
separate processes with their own instances of GdkRGB, it may happen that GIMP and
some of its Plug-Ins choose different colormaps, resulting in color flickering.
If you encounter such behaviour, you can activate “Install Colormap” in order to force
GIMP and its plug-ins to use the same colormap.

Colormap Cycling

If you are working on an 8-Bit display, you can display the “Marching Ants” which show
the current selection by means of a rotating colormap instead of re-drawing them all the
time.

12.6 Interface Settings

12.6.1 Interface
General

Preview Size Sets the size of the preview thumbnails present in, for example, theLay-
ers, Channels& Paths dialog.
 

Setting the size to “None” will disable the preview function.

 

Nav Preview Size Will affect the size of theNavigation Window present from the bottom
right corner of the image window or as right-click View Nav Window
CHAPTER 12. DIALOGS 92

Recent Documents List Size Sets the number of previously opened or saved docu-
ments that you can directly access from the Toolbox File menu.

Toolbox

Display Brush, Pattern and Gradient Indicators In theToolBox there is an area dis-
playing the currently active brush, pattern, and gradient. If you don’t want the
area to be present in the ToolBox you can disable it here.

Dialog Behaviour

Navigation Window per Display If you disable this feature, theNavigation Window will
behave like theLayers, Channels& Paths dialog with “Auto” enabled. It will switch
as you switch images.

Info Window Follows Mouse If you enable this feature theInfo Window will behave
like theLayers, Channels& Paths dialog with “Auto” enabled. It will switch as you
switch images.

12.6.2 Help System

General

Show Tool Tips Enables or disables tool tips in The GIMP.

   
 
Context Sensitive Help with  F1 Enables or disables the  Shift 
F1 method of en-
abling context sensitive help. It can sometimes interfere with the window man-
ager. You can still access the context help in the Toolbox Help menu.

Help Browser

Help Browser to Use Lets you choose which HTML browser The GIMP uses for dis-
playing it’s help files: its internal one or your web browser.

12.6.3 Image Windows

Appearance

Use “Dot by Dot” by default Let’s you choose whether to activate the pixel-by-pixel
mode by default or not.

Resize Window on Zoom Enables and disables window resize on zoom. Normally
when you zoom, the window size will not be affected. If you enable this function,
the size of the window will be adjusted to fit the size of the image when you zoom
in or out. Zooming in will enlarge the window and zooming out will shrink the
window.

Show Rulers Controls whether you want to show the rulers or not by default.

Show Statusbar Controls whether you want to show the statusbar or not by default.
CHAPTER 12. DIALOGS 93

Marching Ants Speed When you make a selection in GIMP there will be a “blinking”
boundary for the selection. This “blinking” boundary is referred to as marching
ants. This option controls how fast the ants will march.

Image Title Format Sets the window title of the image window. The default custom
value is reasonably sane, but you are able to choose from Standard, Show zoom
percentage, Show zoom ratio, Show reversed zoom ratio, and Custom. To build
a custom image title, you can use some macros along with ordinary characters.

Title Format Codes

Code Meaning
%% literal percent sign
%f bare filename, or "Untitled"
%F full path to file
%p PDB image id
%i view instance number
%t image type (RGB, indexed, grayscale)
%z zoom factor as a percentage
%s source scale factor
%d destination scale factor
%D* expands to * if the image is dirty (modified)

Pointer Movement Feedback

Perfect-but-slow Pointer Tracking When you are drawing in GIMP, GIMP will not
catch your pointer every moment. Instead GIMP catches it at a certain time
interval. This means if you draw a circle very fast GIMP will not draw a circle but
lines between each pointer grab. However if you turn on Perfect-but-slow Pointer
Tracking, GIMP will record every single movement and make a perfect circe even
if you draw it very fast. You will, however, not be able to draw in real time instead
that drawing will “played” with a time delay since you “recorded” every movement.1

Disable Cursor Updating Normally when you, for example, paint with some tool, you
will have a little image of the tool as the cursor. If you disable cursor updating, the
cursor will always be a little pencil even if you change tools. I.e. the cursor will
always be the same shape as the last tool you used before you disabled updating.

Cursor Mode Let’s you choose between three different mouse pointer looks, i.e. just
the toolsymbol, the toolsymbol together with a crosshair and simply the crosshair.

12.6.4 Tool Options

Paint Options

Use Global Paint Options Normally when you paint in GIMP, you set the opacity and
paint mode in theBrush Selection dialog. If you enable “Use Global Paint Options”
you will have the opportunity to set both Opacity and Paint Mode separately for
each tool (theTool Options dialog will change and you will have new controls for
Opacity and Paint Mode).
1
Well this is not exactly what happens but it makes it easier to explain it this way.
CHAPTER 12. DIALOGS 94

Finding Contiguous Regions

Default Threshold Here you can choose the default threshold for all tools which is a
measure for the precision of filling and masking tools.

12.7 Environment Settings

12.7.1 Resource Consumption

Conservative Memory Usage

The GIMP is optimized to speed i.e. speed is more important than memory usage.
Enabling “Conservative Memory Usage” will “optimize” GIMP to use less memory. The
tradeoff is of course speed but if your system is low on memory then it can be an option
to use “Conservative Memory Usage”.

Levels of Undo

By default GIMP has five levels of undo. The amount of undo levels is only limited by
disk space. A high amount of undo levels requires a large amount of disk space so use
it with care. The default value is reasonably good for most use.

Tile Cache Size

This is the most important parameter that GIMP has. If you set it too low, GIMP will be
very slow. There isn’t a upper level of how much memory that you can give GIMP. That
is to say, give GIMP as much as you can. But don’t give GIMP more that your physical
memory (i.e. pure memory without swap). In reality you have to measure how much
memory you usually use and give GIMP a little less than the rest of it.

12.7.2 Scaling
Interpolation Type

When you scale an image (make it bigger), you have to fill in missing pixels. The color
and value that those pixels should have is calculated in a interpolation algorithm. GIMP
uses a Linear interpolation algorithm by default. Linear gives you a mid-quality interpo-
lation. Linear interpolation has less quality trade off for speed than Nearest Neighbour
interpolation algorithm does. Nearest Neighbour is the fastest way to interpolate, but
it has the lowest quality of the interpolation algorithms. The Cubic interpolation algo-
rithm produces the highest quality of the three interpolation types supported by GIMP.
However it is considerably slower than the linear interpolation algorithm.

12.7.3 File Saving

Try to Write a Thumbnail File

By default when you save an image, a thumbnail file will be created – storing a little
image of your image. When you mark an image in the file open dialog, you will see this
CHAPTER 12. DIALOGS 95

thumbnail. If you set this option to Never, you have to press the Thumbnail button in
theFile Open Dialog to be able to see a thumbnail of your image.

"File> Save" Saves the Image

This is by default set to “Always” but if you save your image on a networked disk ( NFS,
SMB etc.), saves are sometimes slow and saving isn’t always that necessary. Instead
you will only save when the file is really changed.

12.8 Session Management

12.8.1 Window Positions

Session management is a way to restore the GIMP session that was running prior
to quitting the GIMP. I.e. simply quit GIMP and start GIMP again. GIMP will now
along with the Window Manager try to restore the GIMP session you that was running
before you left GIMP. You can disable or enable this feature with the Always Try to
Restore Session checkbox. GIMP can save its window positions – where, for example,
theGradient Selection dialog is displayed on your display. If you use the Save Window
Position on Exit option then GIMP will save the positions of open dialogs. It can be
useful to arrange your GIMP desktop with this option enabled and then restart GIMP
and disable the option. You will thereby have a consistent desktop each time you start
GIMP.

12.8.2 Devices
If you have a graphics tablet and use it with The GIMP, you will have several devices
that you can preconfigure in theDevice Status dialog. However, if you use the Save
Device Status on Exit option, the preconfiguration will be overwritten and the last state
before exit will be the new configuration.

12.9 Monitor Settings

12.9.1 Get Monitor Resolution

If you create anew image with the size of two by two inches and don’t have right-click
View Dot for dot enabled, then you should be able to the measure the image directly
on the screen to a size of two by two inches.
If the size you read is wrong then you have to adjust your monitor resolution in this
dialog.
The GIMP is using a manual setting by default (72dpix72dpi). If you run GIMP on
a Unix workstation then you can probably use the “From windowing system” option and
get a correct value. If you run on PC hardware you will most likely not be able to use
the value given by the windowing system. You have to measure and set those values
by hand which can be a bit bulky. There are two fields – one with the default measure
unit DPI and one with custom measure unit which can be useful for those who are used
to the metric system.
CHAPTER 12. DIALOGS 96

 
You don’t really want to calculate your resolution manually, so simply press
the Calibrate button to pop up a dialog where you can measure two rulers
and enter their lengths in spin buttons.
 

12.10 Directories
GIMP uses several directories to store such things as add-on filters (plug-ins), scripts,
brushes, etc., but also its swap and temporary files.
The top view in Directories controls T emp Dir and Swap Dir. The Swap Dir is, by
default, in your personal GIMP directory located in your home directory. Often your
home directory is on an NFS (UNIX) or SMBWindows server. If it is, GIMP will have its
memory swap slowed down due to network latency. It is therefore very important that
the GIMP directory is a local directory such as /tmp under Unix or C:
temp underWindows. The temp dir is a directory where GIMP will store temporary files
such as the palettes that work with but more important the image data itself that cannot
be kept in memory. The temp dir should not be in a public directory such as /tmp, but a
directory to which only you have read and write access.
The subcategories such as Brushes, Patterns, and Plug-Ins control where GIMP
will search for those items and in which order.

Change a Search Path Mark it by clicking on it. Type

 the changed
 path or browse the
files system with the ... browse button. Press 
Enter 
to activate the new path.

Change Search Order Mark a search path and click on the or buttons
to change the search order.

New Search Path Click on the  . Type

 the path or browse the files system
with the ... browse button. Press 
Enter 
to activate the path.

Delete Path Mark the path you wish to delete and click on the .

12.11 The Brush Selection Dialog

In this dialog you choose which brush you want to use and thesettings you want to apply
to the brush. The dialog displays all the available brushes. You may also notice some
of GIMP’s special features like colored brushes (pixmap brushes), brushes with a red
triangle in the right corner (so-called “Image Hose” brushes), brushes with artistic text,
little flourishes and doodles, etc.
All of those brushes are relatively easy to create in GIMP and save in the appro-
priate format. GIMP also provides you with aBrush Editor dialog where you can create
and edit brushes.2
2
you can only edit brushes that are created in the brush editor
CHAPTER 12. DIALOGS 97

12.11.1 Preview and Brush Information

You will see that some of the brushes in the dialog have a little + sign. The + sign
is indicating that the brush preview is scaled to fit the space. To view the real size of
the brush, click and hold on the brush square and the real size brush will appear (and
disappear when you release the mouse).
When you choose a brush, the name and the size of the brush will appear in the
brush dialog. The brush size is measured in pixels.

12.11.2 Settings
Spacing is the distance between your brush marks. If you set the spacing to 100, the
brushmarks will be like a string of pearls. If you set the spacing to zero, the brushmarks
will create a solid, brush-shaped line. If the spacing is higher than 100, the brushmarks
will form a dotted line.

12.11.3 Pixmap Brushes

Pixmap brushes are small images that can be used as a brush. Since the brush is an
image, you can’t alter its color. The color setting in the toolbox will not apply to this
image.
 

If you use color as a pressure sensitivity when you paint you will be able to
change the color of the pixmap brush.
 
Additional Information  
  
Shift 
Default Keyboard Shortcut:  Ctrl
  B

12.12 The Brush Editor Dialog

The Brush Editor dialog allows you to make alterations to brushes. At the top of the
dialog, you can see the name of the brush (a new brush will be called “ Untitled”). This
name can be edited to change the brush name. If you choose a name which is the
same as another brush, GIMP will suffix the name with #x.3
Below the title, you can see a preview of the final brush. If you size the brush to a
size larger than the preview area, the preview will be scaled and the scale factor shown
below it as a ratio, such as 2:1 for 50% zoomed out.

12.12.1 Settings
The remainder of the dialog controls how the brush will look. The Radius controls the
distance from the center of the brush to the furthest edge in pixels. The maximum radius
of a brush is 100 pixels.
The Hardness slider controls how much the brush fades towards its edges. A value
closer to 1 will give a sharp edge and closer to 0 will give a fuzzy, blurred effect.
3
Wherex is a number.
CHAPTER 12. DIALOGS 98

The Aspect Ratio defines the vertical diameter in a ratio to the horizontal diameter.
A value of 1.0 will give a round brush since this means that the horizontal diameter is
the same as the vertical. The maximum value is 20.0 which gives a horizontal diameter
twenty times larger than the vertical, resulting in a very squashed, elliptical brush.
The final setting is Angle which is used when the aspect ratio is more than 1.0.
The angle can be between 0 and 180 degrees, measured counterclockwise.

12.13 The Gradient Selection Dialog

Lets you select a gradient. You are also able to edit the gradient by pressing the “ Edit”
button. This will bring up the Gradient
  Editor. Additional Information
Default Keyboard Shortcut: 
Ctrl 
G

12.14 Gradient Editor

The Gradient Editor allows you to create or edit complex gradients that you can use
with, for example, theBlend tool.
You’ll find a list of all available gradients under Gradients, and the currently selected
gradient can be seen in a preview window. The buttons to the right let you Create,
Copy, Delete and, Rename gradients. You can also Save Gradients in a POV-Ray
format. Refresh Gradients re-reads all gradients from disk. You can also zoom the
gradient with the Zoom buttons present in the main dialog.
The triangles at the bottom of the gradient preview window are color section mark-
ings. Two kinds of marks exist: black endpoints and white midpoints. The area between
two black points is called a segment. You select a segment simply by clicking on it. A
selected segment turns a darker shade of gray. Most work that you do in the gradient
editor will be about changing and editing those segments in one way or another.

• You can move an entire selection by clicking in the darker gray field and dragging.

• Moving a white midpoint affects the color transition.

• Dragging a black endpoint will stretch the area between that endpoint and the
midpoint.
 
• If you click on an endpoint then press Shift and drag, you will compress or
expand the entire selection.
 
• You can extend or add to a selection by pressing the Shift key and clicking on
another segment.

Any of the described manipulations can be used on extended selections.

12.14.1 The Popup Menu

If you press the r ight mouse button in the gradient preview window, a menu will appear
for further editing of the selected segment.
CHAPTER 12. DIALOGS 99

You can edit the left or right color by invoking left or right endpoint color. The Load
From and Save To menu options allow you to load a color from an RGBA channel to
an endpoint or to save an RGBA channel.
In the Blending function submenu from the Segment menu, you will find some
functions that control the appearance of the gradient in your selection.
The Coloring type submenu from the segment menu lets you choose a color
model for your selection or segment. You can choose plain RGB or one of two kinds of
HSV.
The Segment commands will work on the selected segment. If you have selected
more than one segment, they will not be treated as a unit.

• Split segment at midpoint: Puts an endpoint at the midpoint and then divides the
two new segments.

• Split segment uniformly: Splits to a specified amount of segments.

• Delete segment: Deletes the entire selection.

• Re-center segment’s midpoint: Re-centers the midpoints.

• Re-distribute handles in segment: Evenly distributes all the points in the segment.

The Selection operations submenu allows you to flip or replicate the segment
and also allows you to blend the endpoints’ colors and/or opacity.

12.15 Copy Gradient

Lets you specify the name of the copied gradient. The copy will be stored in your
personal GIMP gradient directory.

12.16 Delete Gradient

A confirmation dialog asks if you really want to delete the gradient. Remember that
sometimes you cannot actually delete the gradient because you lack the necessary
rights to the file. But you better be sure (especially under W IN 32) because you will not
be able to undo the delete. However, if you are not entitled to delete the Gradient, it will
be deleted from the rest of your present GIMP Session and reappear the next time you
start GIMP.

12.17 New Gradient

Lets you specify the name of the new gradient. The newly created gradient will be stored
in your personal GIMP gradient directory (normally ˜/gimp-1.2/gradients).
CHAPTER 12. DIALOGS 100

12.18 Rename Gradient

Lets you specify a new name for a gradient. When you rename a gradient, the renamed
gradient will appear in your personal GIMP gradient directory. If, however, you have
the permission to alter files in the system-wide GIMP gradient directory, the file will be
erased from that directory. This means that other users on the system will not be able
to use the gradient even if you only renamed it. So you need to be sure what you are
doing. Be fair to others and don’t deprive them of gradients!

12.19 Replicate Segment

Lets you specify the amount of copies that you want to create. The copies will be
squeezed into the original segment’s space.

12.20 Save as PovRay

PovRay Lets you save your gradient as a P OV R AY gradient. You have to choose the
location and name of the P OV R AY gradient.

12.21 Split Segments Uniformly

Lets you specify the number of subsegments into which your segment should be divided.

12.22 The Pattern Selection Dialog

Lets you set the active pattern. The pattern selected will also be shown as a preview in
the toolbox status area. The patterns are often bigger than the view area in the dialog.
To be able to view the entire pattern, click and hold on the pattern. A popup window
will appear showing the entire pattern. If you have several devices, the pattern will be
assigned to the current device.
If you install a pattern after you started GIMP, you must click on Refresh before
you can view and use it. Additional  
 Information
 
Default Keyboard Shortcut:  Shift Ctrl
  P

12.23 The Color Palette Dialog

Palette You have two tab folders in the Color Palette dialog. One to select the palette
you want to use and one to interact with the palette that you select.

Select Within the Select tab, you will see small thumbnails of all available palettes.
There is also information about the number of colors in the palettes and their
names. You can choose a palette for direct usage by simply clicking on it and
shifting to the Palette tab. You can edit the palette you selected by clicking on the
edit button which will bring up the Color Palette Editor dialog. Note that you can
CHAPTER 12. DIALOGS 101

also edit a palette in the Palette tab folder, but the Color Palette Editor gives more
options.

Palette Within the Palette tab, you interact with your palette. The primary usage of the
dialog is, naturally, to choose colors from the palette.
 
It is very cumbersome to use the color selector to choose colors when
you work with a project. The best way to work is to have a color
palette.
 

You can, however, also use this window to edit the palette. Right click (and hold)
on a color cell and a menu will appear. Within the menu you can edit the color in
the cell, delete the cell, or create a new cell which will be added in the bottom row
of your palette. The name which appears when you either r ight or left click on a
color cell can also be changed. All changes that you make in the palette will be
autosaved and available immediately.

The Zoom buttons enable you to zoom in and out in the palette. Additional Informa-
tion  

Ctrl 
Default Keyboard Shortcut:  P

12.24 The Palette Editor

12.24.1 General
In the Palette Editor, you can edit palettes, create new palettes, import palettes, merge
palettes, and delete palettes. You also have an option to refresh palettes. You have to
use this option to make palettes installed after you started GIMP available and ready
for use.

Edit Palette

Either you can choose the palette to edit in the palette select dialog or you activate it
in the palette editor with a single left click on it. The palette that you are about to edit
will now appear in the edit area. If the palette has a large number of colors, each color
cell in the palette can be rather small. To be able to view and edit the palette you can
therefore zoom in and out with the zoom buttons.
To change the name of a color cell, you first mark it by left clicking on it. The Name
field next to the zoom buttons will be activated and you can change the name.
A r ight click in the edit frame opens the menu. Choose Edit and the standard GIMP
Color Selector will appear. This allows modification of the color of the selected cell. New
will add a color at the end of the palette. The new color cell will inherit the color of the
current cell. To alter the newly created cell, right-click in it and choose Edit. Delete in
the menu will delete the current cell.
CHAPTER 12. DIALOGS 102

New Palette

Will create a new, empty palette in the edit frame. A confirmation window with aname
field will appear. When you have created your new palette, you have to insert color cells.
You do that by right-clicking anywhere in the edit area and selecting New from the popup
menu.

Delete Palette

Will delete your palette.

Import Palette

Will bring up theImport dialog where you can create a new platte from a gradient, image,
or indexed palette.

Merge Palette

You are able to merge palettes in the editor. The new palette is a combination of the
selected palettes. To merge two or several palettes you have to mark the palettes that
you want to merge and click on Merge. This opens theName dialog. There are two
ways to mark palettes. Either you<Modkey> click, you will then mark a single palette
each time (or unmark). You can also<Modkey> click which will mark all palettes from
the first marked to the last marked palette.

12.25 Delete Palette

Deletes the selected palette.
 

The palette is deleted from disk too.

 

12.26 Import Palette

12.26.1 General
In the Import Palette dialog, you set the import source. You can import (create) a palette
from an image, a gradient or an index palette (read index image).

Import from Gradient

Select gradient as source

Set the name of the palette you are about to create.
Click on Select in the Preview area in order to bring up the Gradient selection dialog
where you will choose the source gradient.
Set the amount of colors that you want in the palette in the Sample Size field.
CHAPTER 12. DIALOGS 103

Import from Image

Select Image as source

Set the name of the palette you are about to create.
Choose the one of the currently opened images from which you want to create a
palette.
 
You will create the palette from all visible layers within that image. (as if
you had merged all visible layers). Please see 39 for an explanation of
layer functions.
 
Set the Interval, which will control – TODO
Set the amount of colors that you want in the palette in the Sample Size field.

Import from Index Palette

Select Index Pallete as source

Set the name of the palette you are about to create.
Choose the one of the currently opened indexed images from which you want to
create a palette.
Set the amount of colors that you want in the palette in the Sample Size field.
 
There is no value in having more colors in the palette than in the indexed
image. You can view and alter the the indexed palette in theIndexed Palette
dialog. This will also give you an opportunity to evaluate how many colors
are present in the indexed palette.
 

Finally

When you are done click Import and a new palette will be created. Close cancels that
whole operation.

12.27 Merge Palette

Lets   the new palette
you name  which will consist of the colors in the selected palettes.
Use  Shift 
or 
Control to select multiple palettes.

12.28 New Palette

Creates a new palette and allows for a name to be given.

12.29 Indexed Palette

Allows you to edit and alter the palette present in an indexed image. Remember that
you can only paint with the colors present in your indexed palette. This is why it’s very
handy to be able to add or alter colors in the palette.
CHAPTER 12. DIALOGS 104

Altering a color Choose the color that you want to alter by clicking on it. Choose edit
from the Operation menu. This will bring up the GIMP color selector which
enables you to pick a replacement color.

Adding a color If your indexed image contains less that 256 colors, then you can add
a color. Choose Add from the Operation menu. A new color will appear as the
last color in the palette. The new palette color is a copy the previous color in the
palette. You are now free to alter the color and use it in your image.

12.30 Input Devices

The Input Devices dialog will only appear in the described form if you have Xinput en-
abled and are using it to support a drawing tablet or other input device. If you don’t have
an alternative input device, or your device is set up incorrectly, you will get the message
"No input devices".

12.31 The Device Status Dialog

The Device Status dialog will show you the status of your input devices. This is only
useful if you have a drawing tablet. If you do have one, then you will be able to see and
adjust what tool, color, brush, pattern, and gradient are assigned to your different pens
(i.e input devices).
To alter the context each device has, simply drag and drop brushes, tools, etc. with
the middle mouse button from the respective dialog (e.g you drag and drop tools from
the toolbox).
It can be very wise to set up a standard context for all your tools and save it (and
disable saving of device status on exit in the Preferences dialog). By doing so you will
always have the same settings for the tools each time you start GIMP.

12.32 The Document Index Dialog

The Document Index dialog will enable you to see all previously opened images in The
GIMP.
 

Big is watching you.

 
You can open an image by double clicking on the entry for it or by marking it and
clicking Open. You are also able to sort the index by moving the position of entries or
removing them.
CHAPTER 12. DIALOGS 105

12.33 The Error Console Dialog

The Error Console will show internal GIMP error messages. An example of such an
error is when GIMP fails to save or load an image.
If you encounter a bug in GIMP, it can be wise to open the error console and try
to reproduce the bug. If GIMP then produces any error messages, you can email
[email protected] the message along with a bug description to the GIMP developers at
[email protected].

12.34 Undo History

Shows the history of your image editing along with thumbnails. This makes it very easy
to jump back and forth in the command history.
 
Always use Undo History when you work on hard and difficult tasks. It is a
whole lot easier to jump 
ten steps
 back just by clicking in the Undo History

dialog than doing it with 
Ctrl 
Z
.
 

12.35 The Standard GIMP Color Selector

You can change the color manually by clicking on a hue in the spectrum color field to the
right, and then dragging the cross in the large color box on the left to the exact color you
want. If you want a specific RGB (Red, Green, Blue) or HSV (Hue, Saturation, Value)
color, type the exact value in the HSV or RGB parameter fields or drag the sliders to
specify a color.
The H (hue) channel is displayed in the color fields by default when you open the
Color Selection dialog. However, you can choose to search in another channel for the
color you want. It can be very useful to change the channel to S (saturation) or V
(value) when you’re searching for a specific color. The color spectrum will be displayed
in a quite different way by doing this and you might find it more useful.
In the bottom of the dialog you will find the current color specified as a hexedecimal
triplet. The function is targeted at web developers – to get the color code into your
HTML document simply select it and paste it in   middle
with your  mouse
 button. If you
are using GIMP FOR W INDOWS you must use  Ctrl  C

and Ctrl
  
achieve the
V to
same result.

12.36 The GTK Color Selector

The GTK Color Selector is similar toGIMP’s standard color selector. The main difference
is that you can’t select in which color space you want to work. The left color bar is always
working in value mode and you can alter the hue and saturation by dragging your mouse
in the circle.
Another difference is that the RGB values are represented in percent instead of
values from 0 to 255. 100% (1.0) is 255 and 0% (0.0) is 0. The fact is that you should
see it as the amount of e.g. red that you want to mix into your color.
CHAPTER 12. DIALOGS 106

12.37 The Triangle Color Selector

The triangle color selector is one of the best color selectors in GIMP. This is due to the
fact that it allows you to visualize hue, value and saturation simultaneously. You control
the hue by dragging the triangle around in the outer circle. When you have selected
your base color, you simply alter the value and saturation by pressing and dragging
inside the triangle color scale.

12.38 The Watercolor Color Selector

This color selector resembles the little water cup you use for blending colors when you’re
making a watercolor painting.
If you want to mix a color, simply move the mouse over the color scale while pressing
the left mouse button. If the color gets too dark you just press the right mouse button
to fade the color. You can also set the pressure with which you collect the colors. Setting
a low pressure means you have to drag more to get a dark, highly saturated color, but
gives better control over the mixing.
You can save ten colors in the dialog. If you want to save a color that you have
mixed, just press new and the color will appear in the color array. Remember that you
can only save ten colors. If you already have ten colors and save a new color, the oldest
one will be replaced.

12.39 Edit Qmask Attributes

Allows you to alter the name, color, and fill opacity of the quick mask channel.
The F ill Opacity is used to set how much of the underlying image is visible when
you work with the quick mask. If you set it too high, you will not be able to see the image
underneath. Use a color that allows a good visibility of the underlying image (i.e. not
red if it is a red image).
CHAPTER13

Filters

13.1 Filters Introduction

This chapter describes the many filters, plug-ins, and tools that ship with T HE GIMP by
default.

13.2 Reshow Last Filter

The Re-Show Last command will redisplay the last used filter that was applied to the
image. Additional Information  
  
Default Keyboard Shortcut: 
Shift 
Alt 
F

13.3 Repeat Last Filter

The Repeat Last Filter command will apply the most recently run filter again. Additional
Information   
Default Keyboard Shortcut: 
Alt 
F

13.4 2x2 Contrast Enhance

Our apologies
Sorry, but the help page for this item is not written yet. Can I help?
Yes you can! Please send a message to [email protected] with 2x2 Contrast
Enhance as the subject line. Feel free to also include documentation related sugges-
tions or fix requests.

13.5 Add Dust

Overview
The Add Dust filter adds curled, grey, dust-like elements to the active layer. Dust
Options
Dust Settings

107
CHAPTER 13. FILTERS 108

Density Density controls the amount of dust elements that will populate the layer. A
setting that is too high here can become extremely processor-intensive, so adjust
this setting carefully.

Seed Seed is the numeric randomization base. Changing this number will result in
different dust element shapes and positions.

Length Length controls the length of the dust artifacts. A higher setting here will result
in longer curls of dust.

13.6 Adjust FG-BG / Color Range Mapping

Overview
The Adjust FG-BG filter applies your current Foreground and Background colors
to the active image based on brightness of the image. The filter determines the color
gradient of the image based on the coloring of the image, and applies a gradient based
on the Foreground, and Background colors.
The Color Range Mapping filter provides a dialog such that the Foreground and
Background colors may be chosen. Colors for the source and destination may be se-
lected. Color Mapping
A common use for this filter is repairing the color balance of faded photos. Opening
a faded photo, and selecting a Foreground, and Background colors that are suitable for
the photo, and then running the Adjust FG-BG, can produce desirable results.

13.7 Alien Map 2

Overview
The Alien Map 2 filter is a color manipulation filter based on the Alien Map filter. Alien
Map 2 is much more advanced in that it can perform calculations based not only on the
RGB properties of the active image or layer, but also the HSL properties of the active
image. More control of the math involved is possible, allowing the user to adjust the
Frequency and the Phaseshift values which can yield more profound transformations.
Alien Map 2 Options
Alien Map 2 Settings

Mode There are two available options for Mode.

• RGB Color Model: This option will allow Alien Map 2 to work with Red,
Green, and Blue colors only.
• HSL Color Model: This option will allow Alien Map 2 to work within the Hue,
Saturation, and Luminance of the image, layer, or selection.

Modify Red/Hue Channel This checkbox allows modifications to be made to the Red
or Hue of the active selection or layer.

Modify Green/Saturation Channel This checkbox allows modifications to be made to

the Green or Saturation of the active selection or layer.
CHAPTER 13. FILTERS 109

Modify Blue/Luminance Channel This checkbox allows modifications to be made to

the Blue or Luminance of the active selection or layer.

Frequency Sliders The F requency sliders control changes to the applicable channel.
The slider determines the frequency intensity at which the colors will be mapped.

Phaseshift Sliders The Phaseshift sliders control changes to the applicable channel.
The slider determines the shift in frequency that will be used to map the channel
colors.

See also
Further information can be found in the glossary regarding: Channels and HSL

13.8 Alien Map

Overview
The Alien Map filter is a color mapping filter that works by applying mathematical
algorithms to the existing color values in the active image. The mathematical color
adjustments are made using a combination of Sine, Cosine, and None in varying am-
plitudes.. Alien Map Options
Alien Map Settings

Red / Green / Blue Channels The Red, Green, and Blue channel labels display and
allow selection of the mathematical transform that will be used on that color chan-
nel.

• Sine: The pixel color for that channel will be adjusted using Sine calcula-
tion.
• Cosine: The pixel color for that channel will be modified using Cosine
calculation.
• None: No adjustment will be made to this color channel.

Red / Green / Blue Sliders The three sliders represent the amount of color that will be
used in the chosen calculations for each channel. The maximum value will use
all available color information for that channel.

See also
Further information can be found in the glossary regarding: Channels .

13.9 Align Layers

Our apologies
Sorry, but the help page for this item is not written yet. Can I help?
Yes, you can! Please send a message to [email protected] with Align Layers
as the subject line. Feel free to also include documentation related suggestions or fix
requests.
CHAPTER 13. FILTERS 110

13.10 Animate Cells

Our apologies
Sorry, but the help page for this item is not written yet. Can I help?
Yes, you can! Please send a message to [email protected] with Animate Cells
as the subject line. Feel free to also include documentation related suggestions or fix
requests.

13.11 Animation Play

Our apologies
Sorry, but the help page for this item is not written yet. Can I help?
Yes you can! Please send a message to [email protected] with animationplay
as the subject line. Feel free to also include documentation related suggestions or fix
requests.

13.12 Animation Optimize / Unoptimize

Our apologies
Sorry, but the help page for this item is not written yet. Can I help?
Yes, you can! Please send a message to [email protected] with animoptimize
as the subject line. Feel free to also include documentation related suggestions or fix
requests.

13.13 Apply Lens

Overview
The Apply Lens filter simulates a fish eye lens and provides user controlable re-
fraction. Apply Lens Options
Apply Lens Settings

Parameter Settings There are three available options.

• Keep Original Surroundings: This radio selection will leave the original im-
age as the background and place the refracted image above it.
• Set Surroundings to Background Color : This option will remove the original
image, replacing it with a fill of the current background color. The refracted
image will be placed above this color.
• Lens Refraction Index: This setting dictates the amount of refraction that
will be used for the filter. Higher settings will result in a less recognizable
image.
CHAPTER 13. FILTERS 111

13.14 Apply Canvas

Overview
This filter applies a canvas-like effect to the current image. It textures the image as
if it were an artist’s canvas.
 

This filter is comparable to the GIMPressionist filter .

 
The Apply Canvas Options
Apply Canvas Settings

Direction The four selectable directions make very little difference to the final render.
Direction sets the starting direction of the canvas render.

Depth The Depth slider controls the apparent depth of the rendered canvas effect. A
higher setting here will render the canvas in a more intense fashion.

13.15 Auto Crop

Overview
The AutoCrop tool crops an image down to size using the most significant color
weights as a guide. Given an image that has a single color frame, AutoCrop will crop
away the frame.
 

This tool is extremely unintelligent and should only be used for mindless
cropping.
 
See also
A more intelligent cropping tool is the Zealous Crop Tool . Of further interest is the
Crop Tool .

13.16 Autostretch HSV

Overview
This tool automatically stretches the contrast for all three channels. It does so within
HSV color space, preserving hue.
For each channel in the image, the tool finds the maximum and minimum values
and stretches the histograms to the full contrast range. See also
Further information can be found in the glossary regarding: HSV and Channels
Further histogram information can be found on the Histogram help page.
CHAPTER 13. FILTERS 112

13.17 Blended
Our apologies
Sorry, but the help page for this item is not written yet. Can I help?
Yes, you can! Please send a message to [email protected] with blended2 as the
subject line. Feel free to also include documentation related suggestions or fix requests.

13.18 Blinds
Overview
The Blinds filter allows you to remove bands of your image at regular intervals, giving
a blinds-like effect. Blinds Options
Blinds Settings

Orientation The two available options for Orientation are Horizontal and Vertical.
They align the blinds accordingly.

Background The color of the of the blinds is defined by the background color in the
Toolbox . If transparent blinds are required, an Alpha channel must first be added
using the Add Alpha Channel function. Clicking the Transparent checkbox will
create transparent blinds if an alpha channel exists.

Displacement Altering the displacement changes the height or width of the blinds de-
pending on which Orientation has been selected

Num Segments The Num Segments slider defines how many slats are in the blind.
These slats are distributed evenly over the selection.

13.19 Blow in/out

Our apologies
Sorry, but the help page for this item is not written yet. Can I help?
Yes, you can! Please send a message to [email protected] with blowinout as the
subject line. Feel free to also include documentation related suggestions or fix requests.

13.20 Blur
Overview
The Blur filter makes your image appear out of focus by randomly displacing pixels.
You can alter the amount by which the image is blurred (the distance that pixels are
displaced) by adjusting the r epeat value (between 1 and 100). Blur Options
Blur Settings

Random Seed The Random Seed setting controls the randomization element of the
blur. Selecting a numeric value here will allow haphazard control of the random-
ization element of the blur.
CHAPTER 13. FILTERS 113

Time A subset of the Random Seed, Time, will initialize every blurring using the clock
of the hardware platform. This ensures better randomization results than using
numeric seeds.

Randomization% This slider represents how much randomization will take place dur-
ing the blur. Higher values will lead to more blurring.

Repeat The Repeat slider determines how many times the filter will be used on the
active layer or selection. A high Repeat value will lead to more blurring.
 
Be aware that Repeat sets the number of times the filter runs, so
selecting very high values may take a considerable amount of time to
render.
 

13.21 Border Average

Our apologies
Sorry, but the help page for this item is not written yet. Can I help?
Yes, you can! Please send a message to [email protected] With Border Average
as the subject line. Feel free to also include documentation related suggestions or fix
requests.

13.22 Bumpmap
Our apologies
Sorry, but the help page for this item is not written yet. Can I help?
Yes, you can! Please send a message to [email protected] with bumpmap as the
subject line. Feel free to also include documentation related suggestions or fix requests.

13.23 Burst
Overview
The Burst filter renders a series of lines in a radial fashion using the currently se-
lected brush. The lines start in the center of the image and radiate outward in a user-
defined manner. The color of the spokes is set using the foreground color in theToolbox.
Burst Options
Burst Settings

Shape The Shape section allows control over the final overall shape of the render.

• A setting of Rectangle will terminate the spokes so that an overall rectan-

gular shape is achieved by the spokes.
• The Ellipse setting renders the spokes so that the ends form a circular
shape.
CHAPTER 13. FILTERS 114

Fade direction F ade dirdescribes the direction from which the spokes will fade. The
actual fading is set in the Brush Options.

• In renders the spokes from the outside inwards.

• Out renders the spokes from the inside outwards.

Spokes The Spokes setting changes the number of spokes that will be used in the
render.

Inside Pixels The Inside Pixels setting controls the distance from the center of the
image from which the spokes will begin rendering.

Outside Pixels The Outside Pixels setting controls how far the spokes will radiate.

Start angle Start Angle controls the angle at which the first spoke will be rendered.

Arc angle Arc Angle sets the overall maximum number of degrees that the spokes will
traverse. A setting of 180 here would render the spokes along half of the total
degrees available in a circle.

13.24 BZ2
Overview
T HE GIMP is capable of loading and saving images which have been bzip2 com-
pressed. In order to save a bzipped file, either Save By Extension or the bz2 extension
can be used. The file must be named in a similar format to: filename.extension.bz2
whereextension is the extension of a supported file format. Saving a bzipped TIFF
If the file is named foo, the filename could be entered as either foo.tif.bz2 or
foo.tiff.bz2. BZ2 : Further Information
For this plug-in to work, the B ZIP 2 application is required. To check if this application
is present, type bzip2 -version in a terminal window. If there is output similar to:
bzip: command not found then B ZIP 2is not installed and this plug-in cannot be
used..
 

B ZIP 2 is available from Cygnus Sourceware.

 

13.25 Stretch Contrast

Overview
This tool automatically stretches the contrast for all three channels. For each chan-
nel in the image, the tool finds the maximum and minimum values and stretches the
histogram to the full contrast range. See also
Further histogram information can be found on the Histogram help page.
A more intelligent version of this filter is the Autostretch HSV filter.
CHAPTER 13. FILTERS 115

13.26 Center Guide

Overview
The Center Guide filter places a horizontal and a vertical guide on your image.
Center Guide Options
Center Guide Settings

Physical This checkbox will place the guides in the exact pixel center of the image.

Optical This checkbox will place the guides in the optical center of the image. The
optical center differs in that it represents more what the human eye and brain
visualize as the center of the image.

See also
For further guides information see the glossary entry for Guides.

13.27 Checkerboard
Overview
The Checkerboard filter is a straight-forward check renderer. There are two options
available for this filter. Checkerboard Options
Checkerboard Settings

Check Size The Check Size slider adjusts the size of the squares in pixels. A higher
setting, obviously, results in larger squares. For fine tuning, a text-entry box is
provided. Of note is the coloring of the checks. Only two colors are used. These
are set by changing the F oreground and Background colors in the Toolbox.

Psychobilly The Psychobilly checkbox, although not self-explanatory, is quite sim-

ple. Checking this option will result in the size of the squares being increased
incrementally starting from the top-left corner of the image window. This gives an
appearance of a three dimensional plateau.
 

As with most render filters, Checkerboard is destructive.

 

13.28 CML Explorer

Our apologies
Sorry, but the help page for this item is not written yet. Can I help?
Yes, you can! Please send a message to [email protected] with cml_explorer
as the subject line. Feel free to also include documentation related suggestions or fix
requests.
CHAPTER 13. FILTERS 116

13.29 Color Enhance

Overview
The Color Enhance filter runs an automatic saturation stretch on the three channels
in the image. It does so within HSV color space, preserving hue.
For each channel in the image, the tool finds the maximum and minimum saturation
values and stretches the histograms to the full saturation range. See also
Further information can be found in the glossary regarding: HSV and Channels
Further histogram information can be found on the Histogram help page.

13.30 Color Exchange

Overview
The Color Exchange filter performs color replacement on user-defined colors. By
selecting a “From color” from the image window within the Color Exchange dialog win-
dow and then selecting an appropriate “To Color”, the selected color will be replaced.
Color Exchange Options
Color Exchange Settings

Preview Window This filter provides a preview window that can also be used as a color
selection window. Simply click with Button1inside the preview window to change
the F rom Color to whatever color themouse cursor is over at the time.

From Color At the top of this section is a clickable color well. This color well launches
the color selection dialog which allows the selection of a source color range.
There are two groups of three sliders available that alter the way this filter oper-
ates.

• Red: This slider alters the amount of red color information used for the
F rom Color color well.
• Green: This slider alters the amount of green color information used for the
F rom Color color well.
• Blue: This slider alters the amount of blue color information that is used for
the F rom Color color well.

• Red Threshold: This slider changes the aggressiveness for the amount of
red used in the color selection.
• Green Threshold: This slider changes the aggressiveness for the amount
of green used in the color selection.
• Blue Threshold: This slider changes the aggressiveness for the amount of
blue used in the color selection.

Lock Thresholds The Lock Thresholds checkbox forces all threshold sliders to work
in unison, providing balanced selection aggression across all three color ranges.

To Color The T o Color section provides the mapping for the color destination. All
colors that are selected using the options available in the F rom Color section will
be mapped to the color selected here.
CHAPTER 13. FILTERS 117

• The color well can be clicked to launch the color selection dialog.
• If a more manual method of color selection is required, there are three slid-
ers available here. Each of these sliders represents one of the three primary
colors that are available in the context of the image.

13.31 Colorify
Overview
The Colorify filter remaps all color pixels in the active selection or layer to a chosen
color. It preserves the luminosity of the image. Colorify Options
Colorify Settings

Color Wells The filter provides seven predefined colors for convenient selection, but
another color can be selected by clicking Custom Color. A color selection dialog
will open in which the desired color can be selected. The color contained in the
Custom Color well is the actual color used for the filter.

13.32 Color to Alpha

Overview
The Color to Alpha filter replaces selected color information with alpha. The filter
will attempt to preserve antialiasing information by utilizing a partially intelligent routine
that replaces weak color information with weak alpha information. In this way, areas that
contain an element of the selected color will maintain a blended appearance with their
surrounding pixels. Color to Alpha Options
Color to Alpha Settings

From Color The From Color color well is where color choice can be made for the
filter. Clicking this well will provide a color selection dialog and any color can be
selected from here to be used for the transform.
 
If selection of an exact color is required, use the Color Picker to select the
correct color then drag and drop the color from the color picker to the color
well in the Color to Alpha dialog.
 
See also
Further information can be found in the glossary regarding: Alpha

13.33 Compose
Our apologies
Sorry, but the help page for this item is not written yet. Can I help?
Yes, you can! Please send a message to [email protected] with Compose as the
subject line. Feel free to also include documentation related suggestions or fix requests.
CHAPTER 13. FILTERS 118

13.34 Convolution Matrix

Our apologies
Sorry, but the help page for this item is not written yet. Can I help?
Yes, you can! Please send a message to [email protected] with Convolution
Matrix as the subject line. Feel free to also include documentation related sugges-
tions or fix requests.

13.35 Cubism
Overview
The Cubismplug-in modifies the image so that it appears to be constructed of small
squares of semitransparent tissue paper. The Cubism Options
Cubism Settings

Use Background Color This selection box determines whether the background color
displayed in the Toolbox should be used when applying the filter. If it is not
checked, black will be used instead.

Tile Size This variable determines the size, in pixels, of the squares to be used. This
is, in effect, the size of the little squares of tissue paper used in generating the
new image. The slider can be used, the exact pixel size can be entered into the
text box, or the arrow buttons can be used.

Tile Saturation This variable specifies how intense the color of the squares should
be. This affects the opacity of the squares. A high value will render the squares
very intensely and does not allow lower squares to show through. A lower value
allows the lower squares to be more visible through the higher ones and causes
more blending in the colors. If this is set to 0 and Use Background Color is not
checked, the entire layer will be rendered black. If it is checked and the value
here is zero, the background color will fill the entire layer.
 
If you are using this to generate background images for web pages and the
like, work with a small range of colors painted randomly on a small square.
Then apply the Cubism filter with the desired settings. As a last step, try
Filters Map Make Seamless to adjust the image so it will tile seamlessly
in your background.
 

13.36 Curve Bend

Our apologies
Sorry, but the help page for this item is not written yet. Can I help?
Yes, you can! Please send a message to [email protected] with curve_bend as the
subject line. Feel free to also include documentation related suggestions or fix requests.
CHAPTER 13. FILTERS 119

13.37 Decompose
Our apologies
Sorry, but the help page for this item is not written yet. Can I help?
Yes, you can! Please send a message to [email protected] with Decompose as the
subject line. Feel free to also include documentation related suggestions or fix requests.

13.38 Deinterlace
Our apologies
Sorry, but the help page for this item is not written yet. Can I help?
Yes, you can! Please send a message to [email protected] with Deinterlace as the
subject line. Feel free to also include documentation related suggestions or fix requests.

13.39 Depth Merge

Our apologies
Sorry, but the help page for this item is not written yet. Can I help?
Yes, you can! Please send a message to [email protected] with depthmerge as the
subject line. Feel free to also include documentation related suggestions or fix requests.

13.40 Despeckle
Our apologies
Sorry, but the help page for this item is not written yet. Can I help?
Yes, you can! Please send a message to [email protected] with Despeckle as the
subject line. Feel free to also include documentation related suggestions or fix requests.

13.41 Destripe
Our apologies
Sorry, but the help page for this item is not written yet. Can I help?
Yes, you can! Please send a message to [email protected] with Destripe as the
subject line. Feel free to also include documentation related suggestions or fix requests.

13.42 Diffraction
Our apologies
Sorry, but the help page for this item is not written yet. Can I help?
Yes, you can! Please send a message to [email protected] with diffraction as the
subject line. Feel free to also include documentation related suggestions or fix requests.
CHAPTER 13. FILTERS 120

13.43 Displace
Our apologies
Sorry, but the help page for this item is not written yet. Can I help?
Yes, you can! Please send a message to [email protected] with displace as the
subject line. Feel free to also include documentation related suggestions or fix requests.

13.44 Ditherize
Overview
The Ditherize filter reduces the number of colors used in an image without chang-
ing the image type. An RGB image will remain so, although appear as if indexed. The
method and number of colors can be selected. Ditherize Options
Ditherize Settings

Dither Type The Dither type can be set to one of four options.

• none: No dithering will be used.

• fs: Floyd-Steinberg(Normal) dithering will be used.
• fs/low-bleed: Floyd-Steinberg(Reduced Color Bleeding) dithering will be
used.
• ordered: Positioned Color Dithering will be used.

Colors The Colors slider sets the number of colors to reduce the image to.

See also
Further information can be found in the glossary regarding: Dithering

13.45 Edge
Our apologies
Sorry, but the help page for this item is not written yet. Can I help?
Yes, you can! Please send a message to [email protected] with Edge as the subject
line. Feel free to also include documentation related suggestions or fix requests.

13.46 Emboss
Our apologies
Sorry, but the help page for this item is not written yet. Can I help?
Yes, you can! Please send a message to [email protected] with emboss as the
subject line. Feel free to also include documentation related suggestions or fix requests.
CHAPTER 13. FILTERS 121

13.47 Engrave
Our apologies
Sorry, but the help page for this item is not written yet. Can I help?
Yes, you can! Please send a message to [email protected] with engrave as the
subject line. Feel free to also include documentation related suggestions or fix requests.

13.48 Fade Alpha

Our apologies
Sorry, but the help page for this item is not written yet. Can I help?
Yes, you can! Please send a message to [email protected] with Fade Alpha as the
subject line. Feel free to also include documentation related suggestions or fix requests.

13.49 Film
Our apologies
Sorry, but the help page for this item is not written yet. Can I help?
Yes, you can! Please send a message to [email protected] with film as the subject
line. Feel free to also include documentation related suggestions or fix requests.

13.50 Fire
Our apologies
Sorry, but the help page for this item is not written yet. Can I help?
Yes, you can! Please send a message to [email protected] with Fire as the subject
line. Feel free to also include documentation related suggestions or fix requests.

13.51 FITS
Overview
T HE GIMP is capable of reading and writing files using the FITS file type. See also
For further information regarding this file type, see the FITS glossary entry.

13.52 Fit Text

Overview
The F it Text filter renders a text string to a selection area. This filter requires a
selection. Fit Text Options
Fit Text Settings

Font This button will launch the font browser allowing the selection of the typeface or
font that will be used by this filter.

String Any text entered into this input box will be used in the final render for this filter.
CHAPTER 13. FILTERS 122

13.53 Flame
Overview
The F lame filter is a complex rendering tool in the Nature menu. There are many
available options which will affect the result.
The top left area of the Flame window shows a preview pane. Any changes made
to the F lame settings will be displayed here. Flame Options
Flame Settings

Edit Flame Clicking the Edit Flame button will provide an options window. Displayed
are nine versions of the F lame. The center version represents the current flame.
The surrounding eight neighbors represent the alternates based on the Controls
located below the nine previews. Clicking the center image will regenerate the
surrounding flame previews using the same mathematics as the center flame.
Clicking any of the other eight will move the selected flame into the center, and re-
render the surrounding flames using the new center flame as the base. Controls
gives control over the actual flame render. This is achieved through three settings.

• Speed affects the mathematical velocity of the flame render. This setting
can be changed with either the slider or the input box.
• Randomize randomizes the creation method of the flame. Clicking this
button will produce totally random results.
• Variation provides a drop-box with a choice of mathematical algorithms. It
is beyond the scope of this document to describe the mathematics involved
here, but many users with a pure math background will understand this.

Rendering Settings The Rendering options section of the main Flame dialog window
provide many post-render settings.

• Brightness controls the overall brightness of the flame render.

• Contrast sets the contrast of the render. A higher contrast will result in a
sharper render at the expense of color information.
• Gamma adjusts the gamma of the render.
• Sample Density controls the amount of render detail used. A higher setting
here will produce a more detailed render. A lower setting will utilize fewer
pixels to describe the flame.
• Spatial Oversample When this is activated, the effect is calculated on a grid
smaller than pixel size and then resampled for display. This does not appear
to be activated yet in this filter.
• Spatial Filter Radius determines the amount of blur filtering that will be
rendered with the flame. A higher setting will result in a blurred flame.

Colormap Colormap sets the color gradient that will be used with the flame render.
This setting changes the color map that colors the final render. Clicking the name
of the currently selected color map will allow changes to be made here. Gradients,
Layers, and Images can be used as valid color maps.
CHAPTER 13. FILTERS 123

Camera The Camera settings affect the visual rendering of the flame artifact. Z oom
changes the visual closeness to the flame. Valid settings are between -4.00 and
+4.00. X and Y change the position of the flame on the X and Y axis.

13.54 FlareFX
Our apologies
Sorry, but the help page for this item is not written yet. Can I help?
Yes you can! Please send a message to [email protected] with flarefx as the
subject line. Feel free to also include documentation related suggestions or fix requests.

13.55 Filter Pack

Filter Pack Overview
This filter is more a collection of basic color modification filters. It is an interactive
filter. Filter Pack Options
Filter Pack Settings

Before and After The before and after preview windows display the original selection
or image and the result that will be applied if OK is clicked.

Show This section will change the amount of image displayed in the preview windows.

• Entire Image: This will display the entire image in the preview window
ignoring any selection areas.
• Selection Only : If there is an active selection area within the image, this
radio button will toggle the preview windows such that they only display the
selection area.
• Selection in Context: If there is an active selection within the image, this
radio button will toggle the preview windows such that they display the se-
lection area and a percentage of the surrounding non-selected image.

Affected Range This section changes the pixel weight that will be affected by the filter.

• Shadows: All pixels considered to be of shadow weight will be changed.

• Midtones: All pixels considered to be of mid tonal weight will be changed.
• Highlights: All pixels considered to be of highlight weight will be changed.

Select Pixels by This section modifies the pixel selection routine of the filter.

• Hue: All pixels will be modified according to hue.

• Saturation: All pixels will be selected according to saturation.
• Value: All pixels will be selected according to value.

Roughness This slider changes the amount of color modification to make against the
selected pixels. Higher values will increase the amount of color modification made
to the region.
CHAPTER 13. FILTERS 124

Windows The four W indows checkboxes display or hide the four methods of color
modification. These windows are fully interactive.

• Clicking Hue will open the Hue Variations window. Within this window are
six different hue modification previews. Clicking any of the preview windows
will modify the hue of the region with the chosen hue. All preview windows
that are open will update dynamically.
• Clicking Saturation will open the Saturation Variations window. Clicking
either the More Sat. or the Less Sat. previews will increase or decrease
the level of saturation for the region.
• Clicking Value will open the V alue Variations window. Clicking either the
Lighter or Darker will increase or decrease the level of pixel value for the
region.
• Clicking the Advanced checkbox will open the Advanced Filter Pack Op-
tions window. See below for further information on using this part of the
tool.

Advanced Filter Pack Options This section of F ilter Pack allows fine grained pixel se-
lection control.

• The Smoothness of Aliasing section allows the selection of the color range
that will be modified, and the selection of the curve. The curve length can be
changed using the arrow-heads and the curve type can be modified using
the slider at the bottom of the section. The slider will change the curve to
a square tooth when dragged to the left, and a sine-wave when dragged to
the right.
• The Miscellaneous Options section allows the view level for all preview win-
dows. The Preview as You Drag checkbox will activate dynamic updating
of all preview windows. The Preview Size slider changes the zoom level for
all preview windows.

13.56 Fractal Explorer

Our apologies
Sorry, but the help page for this item is not written yet. Can I help?
Yes you can! Please send a message to [email protected] with fractalexplorer
as the subject line. Feel free to also include documentation related suggestions or fix
requests.

13.57 Fractal Trace

Our apologies
Sorry, but the help page for this item is not written yet. Can I help?
Yes you can! Please send a message to [email protected] with fractaltrace as
the subject line. Feel free to also include documentation related suggestions or fix
requests.
CHAPTER 13. FILTERS 125

13.58 Frame Filter

Our apologies
Sorry, but the help page for this item is not written yet. Can I help?
Yes you can! Please send a message to [email protected] with Frame Filter as
the subject line. Feel free to also include documentation related suggestions or fix
requests.

13.59 Frame Reshuffle

Our apologies
Sorry, but the help page for this item is not written yet. Can I help?
Yes you can! Please send a message to [email protected] with Frame Reshuffle
as the subject line. Feel free to also include documentation related suggestions or fix
requests.

13.60 Gaussian Blur

Overview
The IIR Gaussian Blur plug-in displaces pixels in a radius from a central point de-
fined in the dialog. A higher value will produce a higher amount of blur. The blur can be
set to act in one direction more than the other by clicking the Chain Button so that it is
broken, and altering the radii.
 

By altering the ratio of horizontal to vertical blur, you can give the effect of
a motion blur.
 

13.61 RLE Gaussian Blur

Overview
The RLE Gaussian Blur plug-in displaces pixels in a radius from a central point
defined in the dialog. A higher value will produce a higher amount of blur. The blur can
be set to act in one direction more than the other by clicking the Chain Button so that it
is broken, and altering the radii.
 

By altering the ratio of horizontal to vertical blur, you can give the effect of
a motion blur.
 
CHAPTER 13. FILTERS 126

13.62 Dynamic Text Tool

Our apologies
Sorry, but the help page for this item is not written yet. Can I help?
Yes you can! Please send a message to [email protected] with gdyntext as the
subject line. Feel free to also include documentation related suggestions or fix requests.

13.63 GeeZoom!

13.64 Gfig
Overview
The Gfig plug-in is a versatile plug-in that is used to create geometric shapes. It
makes use of definable paths and the currently selected brush. The Gfig dialog window
is neatly divided into three areas. Gfig Options

• Ops contains the shape creation tools. These are the tools that are used to
control the shapes that are created with Gfig.

• Preview contains the shape preview area, the Object Details, and the Collection
Details. The main preview window is where the creation of shapes will occur.

• Settings shows many control options. This area includes save and delete tools
for shapes. Also a mini-preview can be seen. Grid settings are found here, as
well as the rendering options.

Object Settings
The Object section, inside Settings, offers the loading, creation, and saving features
of the plug-in.

Rescan This allows the rescanning of the list of available shapes from the file system.
Any shapes that are saved to the file system can be loaded into the list via this
button. Clicking the Rescan button will display a dialog that shows the currently
loaded shape paths. New paths can be added by clicking the icon in the top left.
A browse button is provided in the top right of the dialog.
CHAPTER 13. FILTERS 127

Load The Load button is used for loading individual shapes into the editor. If there is
a Gfig file located somewhere on the file system, this button is used to load the
shape.

New Clicking this button will remove all of the current shape settings and create a new
shape file. After clicking the New button, a dialog will request a filename for the
new shape.

Delete Delete is the button used to delete a saved shape.

Edit The Edit button is used to transfer the currently displayed small preview into the
main preview window.

Merge The Merge button is used to merge the current shape with the shape in the
main preview window. This function adds the new shape to the current one.

Upon editing an existing shape or creating a new shape, a disk icon will appear next
to the name of the shape. This icon indicates that the shape has not yet been written to
disk. A red cross indicates that the file is read-only and cannot be saved. Grid Options
The Grid settings located below the Object settings control the editing grid layout
and behavior.

Snap to Grid This checkbox toggles grid snaps. When grid snaps are active, drawing
nodes are forced to the nearest grid intersection.

Display Grid This toggles the visibility of the editing grid.

Grid Spacing Grid Spacing adjusts the density of the grid. A higher setting here will
space the grid further apart. A lower setting will make the grid spacing smaller.

The tab section located below Grid settings controls the rendering settings. Tabs
The first tab, Paint, contains basic brush options.

Draw on These options control the layer that will be used for the shape render.

• Original will render the shapes onto the existing layer.

• New will force the creation of a new layer for the shape.
• Multiple option will render each of the individual, unjoined shape compo-
nents to a separate layer.

Using This dropdown list allows the selection of the method by which the shape will be
rendered.

• Brush will render the shape using the currently selected brush. The Brush
tab contains the options that affect this choice.
• Selection will render the shape as a selection area.
• Selection+Fill will render the shape as a filled selection area.

Choosing either of the selection render methods will change the Brush tab to
a Select tab. The Select tab controls settings that affect the selection render
methods.
CHAPTER 13. FILTERS 128

With BG of This dropdown is available only if the Draw on dropdown has either New
or Multiple selected. The available options here change the background setting
for the rendered shape.

• The Transparent setting renders the shape onto a transparent background.

• Background uses the currently selected background color for the shape
background.
• Foreground uses the currently selected foreground color to render the the
background for the shape.
• White will render the shape onto a white background.
• Copy will use a copy of the current layer for the background.
Scale to Image Selecting the Scale to Image toggle will scale the rendered shape to
the size of the image where rendering will take place. If this option is not checked,
then the Scale to Image slider will become active allowing controlled resizing of
the shape at render time. A setting of “1.00” will render the shape at 1:1 scale.

Reverse Line This option will render the shapes in reverse. When creating shapes
there is at least a start node and an end node. By this logic, these nodes, and
consequently all encapsulated between them, can be rendered in reverse order.
Rendering nodes in reverse can be useful for those choosing to use a brush that
fades out, for example.

Approx. Circles/Ellipses This option, when activated, will create an anti-aliasing effect
when rendering the arcs of circles.

Brushes

Brush Selection The Brush dropdown allows selection of the brush type.

• Brush, pencil, and airbrush correspond to the GIMP equivalents that are
found in the Toolbox.
• Pattern fills the brush area with the currently selected pattern. Pattern is
only applicable to circles and ellipses if Approx. Circles/Ellipses is active in
the Paint tab.

Set Brush... The Set Brush... button can be clicked to set up the brush in more detail.
Clicking this button will bring forth the brush selection dialog.

Fade Out This option is only available if Brush is the selected brush type. The slider
sets the number of pixels over which the stroke should be faded. A low setting is
recommended to begin with until more skill is gained judging the lengths of the
strokes.

Gradient This option is only available if Brush is the selected brush type. The gradient
slider selects the number of pixels along a stroke to render the current gradient.
For example, a setting of fifty would render the gradient every fifty pixels.

Pressure This option is only available if Airbrush is the selected brush type. Pressure
is a slider that sets the amount of ink allowed into the brush shape. A low setting
will produce a faint brush, whereas a higher setting will result in a more solid one.
CHAPTER 13. FILTERS 129

Selections
The Select Tab is only made available if Selection is the active option in the Paint
tab.

Selection Type The Selection Type can be set to one of four things.

• Add will merge any existing selection with the shape that will be rendered.
If no selection exists, Gfig will create one.
• Subtract will take the existing selection area and remove the shape from
that area. If no existing selection is present, Gfig will do nothing.
• Replace will remove existing selections and replace them with the current
shape.
• Intersect will change the current selection to an intersection with the shape.
Any area that that the shape overlaps will be kept. Any other areas will be
discarded. If no selection exists, nothing will occur.

Fill Type F ill Type is only applicable if Selection+fill is the active selection in the Paint
tab. There are three options.

• Foreground will fill the selection with the current foreground color from the
Toolbox.
• Background will fill the selection with the current background color from the
Toolbox.
• Pattern will fill the selection with the current pattern fill from the Toolbox.

Fill after The F ill after settings control how selection areas are painted with a pattern.
This option is only available if Selection+Fill is the active Paint option.

• Each Selection ensures that selections are painted after each segment of
the shape is rendered.
• All Selections fills the selected areas only after all shape segments have
been rendered.

Antialiasing Checking the Antialiasing option will turn on the anti-aliasing features of
the renderer. Anti-aliasing can give the effect of smoothness between two areas
of differing color.
See also: Anti-aliasing glossary entry

Fill Opacity This slider sets the level of opacity that the rendered shape will have. A
high setting here will result in more opacity and a lower one in less. Opacity is
defined as “The quality or state of being opaque”. A layer or shape with less
opacity will allow color information from underneath it to be visible to some extent
through it. The extent is based on the level of opacity.

Feather The Feather toggle allows specification of feathering of the selection area.
If Feather is checked, the selection will be feathered to the amount set by the
Radius slider. Feathering produces a faded edge on a selection. This can help to
smooth a layer or shape into a background that may not quite match the shape in
color weight.
CHAPTER 13. FILTERS 130

Radius The Radius slider is a subset of the F eather option. The slider sets the amount
of feathering that will be created against the selection. A high setting here will
result in more feathering.

Options
The Options Tab sets many of the Gfig options.

Show Image The Show Image checkbox toggles whether the current image or layer is
shown in the main Preview window.

Reload Image Reload Image reloads the active image or layer into the main Preview
window. This option can be used to update the window contents in the event that
the image has been changed or modified while Gfig is in use.

Grid Type • Rectangular shows the grid as a standard 90o line grid. This is the
default for most grid based applications.
• Polar displays the grid as a polar grid. Polar grids are circular, as if looking
at a wireframe sphere from above.
• Isometric grids are common to technical drawing fields. Isometric layouts
are also frequently seen in reference to three dimensional work.

Grid Color The Grid Color settings control the color of the displayed grid. It can be use-
ful to change these settings if an image has been loaded into the main Preview
window which might obscure the normal grid.

Max Undo This slider adjusts the number of possible undo operations for the drawing.
Any change made to the drawing can be reverted or undone by using the Undo
button. The Max Undo slider controls the exact number of operations that can
be undone.

Show Position The Show Position checkbox toggles the display of the current X,Y co-
ordinates in the Object Details area, underneath the main Preview window. The
coordinates represent the mouse cursor position within the drawing window.

Hide Control Points This option toggles the display of the control points. The control
points are the squares that are displayed on the start and end points of the shape
lines.

Show Tooltips This option toggles the display of the floating tip windows that are dis-
played if the mouse cursor is hovered over a button or slider for a set period of
time.

About This button displays the Gfig About dialog window. This window provides infor-
mation about the authors.

Operations
The Ops panel is located on the far left side of the Gfig window. This panel is used
for the actual creation of shapes.

Line Tool The line tool is located at the top of the Ops panel. This is the tool used to
draw straight lines. Lines are created by clicking and dragging the mouse cursor.
The initial click point is the start of the line, and the drop point is the end of the
line.
CHAPTER 13. FILTERS 131

Tool The circle tool is the second tool in the Ops panel. The circle tool is used to
create perfect circles. Circles are created by clicking and dragging the mouse
cursor. The initial click point becomes the center of the circle and the drop point
sets the radius of the circle.

Ellipse Tool The ellipse tool is used to create non-symmetrical circles. The ellipses
have either a horizontal or a vertical alignment. Ellipses are created by dragging
the mouse cursor. The initial click point becomes the center of the ellipse and the
drop point sets the X and Y extremities of the ellipse.

Curve Tool The curve tool draws part of a circle. To create a curve, click the start point
of the arc, click the radius of the arc, and finally click the endpoint of the arc.

Polygon Tool The polygon tool draws equilateral polygons between three sided and
two hundred sided. To set the number of sides, double click the tool button. To
create the polygon, click and drag a line. The initial click point becomes the center
of the polygon, and the drop point becomes the radius.

Star Tool The star tool creates star shapes between three points and two hundred
points. To set the number of points simply double click the tool button. To create
the star shape, click and drag the mouse cursor. The initial click sets the center
of the star, and the drop point sets the maximum radius.

Spiral Tool The spiral tool, like the Polygon and Star tools, can be double clicked. This
will display the tool options associated with the spiral tool. Both the direction of
the spiral and the number of turns can be set. The creation of a spiral is similar to
that of a circle. Simply click and drag a line to set the center and the radius and
endpoint of the spiral.

Bezier Tool The bezier tool can create abstract curves. The tool can be double clicked
to display the tool specific options. Within those options are two settings.

• Closed toggles whether to close the bezier curve upon completion.

• Show Line Frame toggles the display of the control lines between nodes
during curve creation.

Creation of a bezier curve requires at least three clicks. The first click sets the
 Allconsecutive clicks set the controls for the curve. To complete the
start point.
curve, shift 
leftclick . If Closed has been toggled, the curve will close automat-
ically.

Move Tool This tool allows the movement of a shape. In order to move a shape, click
one of the control points that belong to the image and drag it. If Hide Control
Points is toggled, the control points will still be able to be clicked for movement,
but will not be visible. This will make it rather difficult to move the shape.

Move Single Point This tool is used to move control points without moving the entire
shape. This can be useful when changing the actual shape, and not just the
position of the shape. Each of the primitives is affected differently by this tool. Of
particular note are the following:
CHAPTER 13. FILTERS 132

• Circles and Ellipses can be moved with the center control point. This will
however relocate the center control point, but not the radius control point.
• The Star shape, when created, contains a third control point located be-
tween the center and the radius. This point controls the length of the spokes.

Copy Tool The copy tool is used to copy shapes. Click any control point that belongs
to the shape that is to be moved and drag the point to a new location.

Delete Tool This tool deletes shapes. Clicking on a control point will remove the shape
that owns the control point.

“<” , “>” , and “==” These three tools control what shapes are displayed in the main
Preview window.

• The “<” and “>” tools cycle through each shape individually. These tools can
be useful for painting shapes by themselves.
• The “==” button redisplays all the shapes that may be hidden after using the
“<” and “>” tools.

Rendering the figure

The list of buttons located at the bottom of the Gfig dialog window produce, clear,
and undo the work in the main Preview window.

Done Clicking will end the current Gfig session.

Paint Paint will render the visible shape with the current settings.

Save This button saves the current shape. If the shape has never been saved to disk
before, Gfig will ask for a filename and location.

Clear This will clear the active Preview and any changes will be lost.

Undo As discussedearlier, this button will revoke the last change made to the shape or
drawing.

Cancel This button will close Gfig.

13.65 GFlare
Our apologies
Sorry, but the help page for this item is not written yet. Can I help?
Yes you can! Please send a message to [email protected] with gflare as the sub-
ject line. Feel free to also include documentation related suggestions or fix requests.

13.66 GIH
Overview
T HE GIMP uses the filetype GIH for animated brushes. Details
The GIH fileformat, or GIMPImageHose, is a greyscale format and stores multiple
layers. At the time of rendering the brush onto a drawable, T HE GIMP renders each of
these layers in turn to achieve an animated brushing.
CHAPTER 13. FILTERS 133

13.67 Gimpressionist
Our apologies
Sorry, but the help page for this item is not written yet. Can I help?
Yes you can! Please send a message to [email protected] with gimpressionist
as the subject line. Feel free to also include documentation related suggestions or fix
requests.

13.68 Glass Tile

Our apologies
Sorry, but the help page for this item is not written yet. Can I help?
Yes you can! Please send a message to [email protected] with glasstile as the
subject line. Feel free to also include documentation related suggestions or fix requests.

13.69 Glowing Steel

13.69.1 Add Glow

Overview
The Add Glow filter renders a glow that surrounds the active layer. Add Glow Options
Add Glow Settings

Glow Color Glow color sets the color of the glow that will surround the layer. Clicking
FG will fetch the current foreground color and clicking BG will fetch the current
background color. Clicking the color will open a color selection dialog, also known
as a color chooser.

Glow radius Glow radius sets the radius in pixels that the glow should extend out from
the active layer.

13.69.2 Brushed Metal

Overview
The Brushed Metal filter renders a brushed metal surface with user controllable
color, angle, and length. Brushed Metal Options
Brushed Metal Settings

Stroke Length Stroke Length defines the length in pixels that will be used for the lines
of the metal.

Angle Angle sets the angle in degrees of the strokes on the surface. An angle of zero
will result in horizontal lines.

Use Gradient / Gradient Use gradient provides a checkbox that will activate the use of
a gradient for coloring. If this checkbox is not active, the filter will use the default
grey coloring. If the checkbox is active, the user may select a gradient from the
Gradient dropdown list.
CHAPTER 13. FILTERS 134

13.69.3 Highlight Edges

Overview
The Highlight Edges filter will produce a new layer from an old one that replicates a
thin shadow and highlight line.

13.70 Gradient Map

Overview
The Gradient Map filter re-maps the active image colors using the currently se-
lected gradient. The filter parses the color information contained in the image and ap-
plies a color replacement using the gradient colors as target colors. See also
Further gradient information can be found on the Gradient Selection help page.

13.71 Grid
Overview
The Grid filter places a custom grid over the image. All aspects of the grid can be
customized. Grid Options
Grid Settings

Horizontal / Vertical The Horizontal, and V ertical settings are used to adjust, W idth,
Spacing, and Offset. W idth sets the line width when rendering the grid. Spacing
affects the distance between the grid lines. Offset determines the offset from the
top-left corner of the image, from which rendering will begin. Located below the
Offset settings, are located the Color Wells, which set the colors for the grid lines.
All of these settings can be “Locked” together to balance the Horizontal, and the
V ertical grid lines, or can be “Unlocked”, to provide more control.

Intersection The Intersection settings add another dimension to the Grid filter, by cre-
ating an intersecting grid that begins within the bounds of the primary one.

Width W idth works much the same as the primary grid settings.

Spacing Spacing affects distance that the intersection grid starts from the point of
origin.

Offset Offset works by extending the length of the rendered lines.

Units One final set of options are the Units dropdowns, which can be adjusted to
reflect different measurement units for the grid lines.

Update Preview This button updates the preview window so any grid changes can be
seen prior to the final render.

Color Wells The three color wells set the color for Horizontal, Vertical, and Intersec-
tion elements.
CHAPTER 13. FILTERS 135

13.72 GIMP Table Magic

Overview
Allows you to configure settings for saving an image as a formatted HTML table.
GIMP Table Magic Options
If Generate Full HTML Document is selected, The GIMP will create a full document
with<HTML>,<BODY>, etc. instead of just producing the code for the table.
The Use Cellspan option makes the resulting HTML table use the<ROWSPAN>
and<COLSPAN> tags to merge contiguous cells of the same color into one large cell.
This will make the resulting document smaller but may not show correctly in older
browsers.
The Compress TD Tags option makes Table Magic leave no space between the<TD>
tag and the cell contents. This improves the layout quality of the result.
A caption can be added to the table by using the Caption option.
Each cell will usually need some content to allow the cell to be visible. You can
use any character her, including HTML escape codes. The default is “&nbsp;” which
enters a non-breaking space which appears like a normal space but allows the cell to
be visible. A normal space character is not sufficient to force the cell to be visible. T able
options defines the standard HTML options for the table: GTM Settings

Border The number of pixels in the table border.

W idth The width for each table cell, either in pixels or percent.

Height The height for each table cell, either in pixels or percent.

Cell-Padding The distance between a cell edge and its contents in pixels.

Cell-Spacing The distance between cells in pixels.

13.73 Remove Guides

Overview
The Remove Guides tool removes all guides and selections from the image. See
also
For further guides information see the glossary entry for Guides.

13.74 Guides to Selection

Overview
The Guides to Selection renders any guides on the image into selections. Be
aware that just the guide is rendered, so any selection areas created by this filter are of
line width. See also
For further guides information see the glossary entry for Guides
CHAPTER 13. FILTERS 136

13.75 Guide Grid

Overview
The Guide Grid filter places a grid arrangement of guides on the image. Guide
Grid Options
Guide Grid Settings

X spacing This option sets the number of pixels between vertical guides.

Y spacing This option sets the number of pixels between horizontal guides.

X offset This setting adjusts the starting point for the horizontal guides.

Y offset This setting adjusts the starting point for the vertical guides.

Remove old guides The Remove existing guides checkbox will remove all guides
from the image before laying down the new grid.

See also
For further guides information see the glossary entry for Guides.

13.76 Guillotine
Overview
The Guillotine tool slices up the current image based on the images guides. A
cut is made along every guide not unlike a guillotine might be used in an office to slice
documents. See also
For further guides information see the glossary entry for Guides.

13.77 GZ
Overview
T HE GIMP is capable of loading and saving images which have been gzip com-
pressed. In order to save a gzipped file, either Save By Extension or the gz extension
can be used. The file must be named in a similar format to: filename.extension.gz,
whereextension is an extension for a supported file format. Saving a gzipped TIFF
If the file is named foo, the filename could be entered as either foo.tif.gz or
foo.tiff.gz. GZ : Further Information
For this plug-in to work, the GZIP application is required. To check if this application
is present, type gzip -version in a terminal window. If there is output similar to:
gzip: command not found then GZIPis not installed, and can not use this plug-in.
 

GZIP is available from The gzip Homepage.

 
CHAPTER 13. FILTERS 137

13.78 Hot
Overview
The Hot filter scans an image for pixels with RBG values that will give unsafe values
of chrominance signal or composite signal amplitude when encoded into an NTSC or
PAL color signal.
 

This tends to happen for certain high intensity, high saturation colors that
are rare in real scenes, but can be easily found in synthetic images.
 
Hot Options
Hot Settings
Create New Layer This option will force the creation of a new layer containing the Hot
adjustment if it is checked. If it is not, then the information will be rendered directly
onto the image.

Mode The two available options here pertain to the output format for the pixel scan.

Action There are three available options in this area.

• Reduce Luminance: Reduce the intensity of the pixels while leaving the hue
and saturation unmodified.
• Reduce Saturation: Reduce the saturation of the pixels while leaving the
hue and saturation unmodified.
• Blacken: Blackens the pixels.

13.79 HRZ
Overview
T HE GIMP can read and write to the HRZ format. The HRZ format used to be used
in amateur slow-scan television broadcasts. The images are always 256x240 pixels and
are uncompressed.

13.80 IFS Compose

Our apologies
Sorry, but the help page for this item is not written yet. Can I help?
Yes you can! Please send a message to [email protected] with ifscompose as the
subject line. Feel free to also include documentation related suggestions or fix requests.

13.81 Illusion
Our apologies
Sorry, but the help page for this item is not written yet. Can I help?
Yes you can! Please send a message to [email protected] with illusion as the
subject line. Feel free to also include documentation related suggestions or fix requests.
CHAPTER 13. FILTERS 138

13.82 Image Tile

Our apologies
Sorry, but the help page for this item is not written yet. Can I help?
Yes you can! Please send a message to [email protected] with image_tile as the
subject line. Feel free to also include documentation related suggestions or fix requests.

13.83 Imagemap
Our apologies
Sorry, but the help page for this item is not written yet. Can I help?
Yes you can! Please send a message to [email protected] with imagemap as the
subject line. Feel free to also include documentation related suggestions or fix requests.

13.84 iWarp
Our apologies
Sorry, but the help page for this item is not written yet. Can I help?
Yes you can! Please send a message to [email protected] with iwarp as the subject
line. Feel free to also include documentation related suggestions or fix requests.

13.85 Jigsaw
Overview
The Jigsaw filter renders a simple jigsaw pattern to the current layer. Jigsaw Options
Jigsaw Settings

Number of Tiles The Number of Tiles settings control both the number of Horizontal
tiles, and the number of Vertical tiles.

Bevel Edges The Bevel Edges settings allow control over the rendering of the edges
of the tiles.

• Bevel Width: This slider sets the width of the shading on each tile.
• Highlight: This slider controls the lighting aggressiveness. A higher Highlight
setting, will produce tiles with more light.

Jigsaw Style Jigsaw Style sets the type of jigsaw cuts that will be rendered.

• Square: This sets the cuts to the traditional squared type of jigsaw puzzle
cuts.
• Curved: This sets the cuts to be made in the more contemporary rounded
cut.

Disable Tooltips There are floating tooltips over all sliders in this plug-in. The display
of these tooltips can be turned on or off with this checkbox.
CHAPTER 13. FILTERS 139

13.86 JPEG
Overview
Allows you to configure settings for saving a JPEG file. JPEG File Options
JPEG File Settings
Comments You can add a comment to the image up to 32,768 characters (32 KB) by
entering text in the Image Comments box. A default comment can be defined in
Preferences.
Quality The parameter settings allow you to alter the way that the JPEG file is saved
to get the best balance between image quality and file size. The Quality slider
changes the quality of the image – a high number (1.00 being the maximum)
gives a better image quality but a larger file size. If you check Preview the image
window will dynamically update as you move the quality slider (or change any of
the other parameter settings) and you will be able to see what the resultant file
size will be in bytes and kilobytes ( KB). Note that depending on the size of the
image, it may take a moment to update the preview and file size information after
adjusting the settings.

Smoothing The smoothing slider adjusts how much the image is blurred to make the
image appear a higher quality. A higher value will lose some of the detail in an
image, but reduce the filesize.

Restart Markers Restart markers are useful for transmitting an image over an un-
reliable network. If a file gets corrupted, it will only be corrupted up to the next
restart marker. Restart markers add a small amount to the filesize of an image.
Restart markers can be between every row (many markers) and every 64 rows
(few markers).

Progressive Mode Progressive mode means that a supporting viewer (such as Netscape
N AVIGATOR) can show a low quality version of an image which progressively im-
proves as the image loads until the full image is displayed. This may slightly
increase filesize (but not always), and is not supported by all viewers.

Force Baseline JPEG Enabling Force Baseline JPEG makes GIMP write a JPEG
which will be readable by all decoders (viewers). This often results in a larger
filesize and/or decreased image quality, especially at low quality settings.

Subsampling Subsampling defines how information is discarded as a ratio of color

(which can be discarded more with less discernible effect) against brightness. It
is defined for the two chroma (color) channels – red/green (Cr) and blue/yellow
(Cb) – as relative to the luma (brightness) channel (Y) of the image by down-
sampling the image by a factor of two in either the x direction only, or both the
x and y directions. This is shown by the format Y,Cr,Cb, so 1x1,1x1,1x1 gives
no subsampling, and thus the highest image quality. 2x2,1x1,1x1 downsamples
both the Cr and Cb channels by half, giving the highest compression available
here. 2x1,1x1,1x1 only downsamples the Cr channel, again by half.

DCT Method The DCT method only influences quality vs. speed. The fastest method
is Fast integer which has a slight quality disadvantage compared to Integer.
Floating-point may give a marginal increase in quality but will be slower to load.
CHAPTER 13. FILTERS 140

13.87 Laplace
Our apologies
Sorry, but the help page for this item is not written yet. Can I help?
Yes you can! Please send a message to [email protected] with Laplace as the
subject line. Feel free to also include documentation related suggestions or fix requests.

13.88 Layer Functions

Our apologies
Sorry, but the help page for this item is not written yet. Can I help?
Yes you can! Please send a message to [email protected] with Layer Functions
as the subject line. Feel free to also include documentation related suggestions or fix
requests.

13.89 Lighting
Our apologies
Sorry, but the help page for this item is not written yet. Can I help?
Yes you can! Please send a message to [email protected] with lighting as the
subject line. Feel free to also include documentation related suggestions or fix requests.

13.90 Logulator
Our apologies
Sorry, but the help page for this item is not written yet. Can I help?
Yes you can! Please send a message to [email protected] with logulator as the
subject line. Feel free to also include documentation related suggestions or fix requests.

13.91 Mail
Overview
The Mail Image tool uses SENDMAIL or a similar mailer to send an image via Email
to an intended recipient. Mail Image Options
Mail Image Settings

Recipient This input box should contain the recipient Email address.Required

Sender This input box should contain the senders Email address. This is usually set
by the mailer, but may be specified here if the sender address is different from the
address that the mailer usually specifies.

Subject This input box specifies the Subject Line of the sent mail.

Comment This input box may contain an optional message comment to send with the
image.
CHAPTER 13. FILTERS 141

Filename This input box should contain the name of the file that will be sent. This
filename does not have to correspond to an existing file on the filesystem, it is
used by UUE NCODE or MIME NCODEto encode the image correctly and for this
requires a filename. The filename must also be suffixed by a valid filetype, such
as .jpg, or an empty mail will be sent.Required

Encapsulation There are two encoding methods available for use with this plugin.
MIME or UU ENCODE. Select the method which either corresponds to an ap-
plication that is either present on the sending computer or one that is preferred.

Message Window The empty area of the dialog is used to take a message that will be
used as body for the Email.
 
This filterr equires the presence of UU ENCODE or MIME NCODE and S END -
MAIL. The install and setup of these applications is beyond the scope of
this document. Please consult your operating system documentation or
seek channels of information closer relating to these applications.
 

13.92 Map to Gradient

Overview
The Gradient Map filter re-maps the active image colors using the currently selected
gradient. The filter parses the color information contained in the image, and applies a
color replacement using the gradient colors as target colors.

13.93 Map Object

Our apologies
Sorry, but the help page for this item is not written yet. Can I help?
Yes you can! Please send a message to [email protected] with mapobject as the
subject line. Feel free to also include documentation related suggestions or fix requests.

13.94 Max RGB

Overview
This filter changes an image based on the highest or lowest value of one the RGB
information. Max RGB Options
Max RGB Settings
Parameter Settings There are two available options here.

• Hold the Maximal Channels: This option will hold for each pixel, the channel
that has the maximum value of either the Red, Green, or Blue. All other
channel information will be cleared.
• Hold the Minimal Channels: This option will hold for each pixel, the channel
that has the lowest value of either Red, Green, or Blue. All other channel
information will be cleared.
CHAPTER 13. FILTERS 142

13.95 Maze
Overview
The Maze filter fills the active selection or layer with a maze. Every square in the
maze is accessible from every other, if you can find the right path. There are no loops.
Features include a choice of maze generation algorithms (Prim’s Algorithm or depth-
first), tileable mazes, and non-rectangular shaped mazes. Maze Options
Parameter Settings changes the width and height of the wall and passage blocks
(currently there is no support for making the two different sizes). The pieces selectors
are provided as semi-intelligent aides to choosing a proper size, taking into account
the tileable mode and image size. They will only choose sizes that divide more or less
evenly into the image size, an even or odd number of times, depending on whether
the maze is to be tileable or not. However, in the end, it is the width and height settings
which are used to produce the maze, so results may not exactly match the pieces setting
if you did something weird to it.
The maze plug-in can generate tileable mazes; that is, make passages going off the
right (or bottom) edge wrap around and be continued on the left (or top). This is useful
for wallpapering and the like.
This places some constraints on the passage size. There must be an even number
of divisions, and the passage size should divide evenly into the image size. Note that
non-tileable mazes have an odd number of divisions. Maze silently enforces this rule.
The r andom seed used to generate the maze. Use the same seed with the same
maze size and wall width, and you’ll end up with the same maze. Pressing the Time
button will use the current time as the random seed.
The plug-in knows two different ways to make mazes: the depth-first method and
Prim’s algorithm. Depth-first ismuch faster than Prim’s algorithm, and generally pro-
duces long, twisty passages. Prim’s algorithm is typically characterized by many very
short passages with frequent branches.
If there is an active selection, maze will keep non-selected portions of the layer as
wall and create maze passages within the selection. If the selection is disjointed, the
plug-in will draw as many mazes as needed to fill all portions of the selection.

13.96 Motion Blur

Overview
The Motion Blur filter is a filter that will “push” the pixels of your image for you,
creating a movement blur. The filter is capable of Linear, Radial, and Z oom movements.
Each of these movements can be further adjusted, with Length, and Angle settings
available. Motion Blur Options
Linear motion is a blur that travels in a single direction, horizontally, for example.
In this case, Length will affect the perceived distance that the pixels are moved from
their original positions. More Length will result in more blurring. Angle describes the
actual angle of the movement. Thus, a setting of 90 will produce a vertical blur, and
a setting of 0 will produce a horizontal blur. Radial motion blur creates a circular blur.
The Length slider is not important with this type of blur. Angle on the other hand, is
the primary setting that will affect the blur. More Angle will result in more blurring in a
circular direction. The Radial motion blur is similar to the effect of a spinning object.
CHAPTER 13. FILTERS 143

The center of the spin in this case, is the center of the image. Z oom blurring produces
a blur that radiates out from the center of the image. The center of the image remains
relatively calm, whilst the outer areas become blurred toward the center. This filter
option produces a perceived forward movement, into the image. Length is the main
setting here, and affects the amount of speed, as it were, toward the center of the
image.

13.97 MIFF
Overview
T HE GIMP can read and write MIFF files. The MIFF (Magick Image File Format) is
the native format of I MAGE M AGICK.

13.98 Mirror Split

Our apologies
Sorry, but the help page for this item is not written yet. Can I help?
Yes you can! Please send a message to [email protected] with mirrorsplit as the
subject line. Feel free to also include documentation related suggestions or fix requests.

13.99 Mosaic
Overview
The Mosaic filter renders a mosaic from the current layer. The filter bases color
selection on the image, and renders user controlled tiles that reflect the layer’s color
properties. There are three T iling Primitives, and numerous options to change the look
of the rendered tiles according to need. Mosaic Options
Mosaic Settings

Antialiasing Antialiasing outputs aliased tiles in the final render. Antialiasing can
produce a higher quality of render, but will slow the render process.

Pitted Surfaces Pitted Surfaces creates a pitted appearance on the rendered tiles
similar to rough concrete, or cement. The effect is characterized by many small
dots on each of the tiles.

FG/BG Lighting FG/BG Lighting renders the mosaic using the foreground and back-
ground colors that are currently selected in the Toolbox. The foreground color
changes the lighting source color, and the background color affects the color of
the lines between the tiles.

Tiling Primitives T iling Primitives sets the shape of the tile. Squares sets the tiles
as squares. Hexagons makes the rendered tiles hexagonal in shape. Oc-
tagons& Squares renders the tiles as a combination of octagons, and squares
that interconnect well. These primitives may loose all recognizable shape after
further adjustments from the T ile Neatness slider.
CHAPTER 13. FILTERS 144

Tile Size T ile Size increases or decreases the pixel size of the tile. Smaller settings
result in more tiles, and larger settings produce larger tiles. This setting can make
significant differences depending on the image size.

Tile Height T ile Height adjusts the amount of light that is rendered onto the tile. A
higher setting here will result in a more rounded tile.

Tile Spacing T ile Spacing settings either widen or shrink the gap between the tiles.
The minimum setting is “1”, which represents a one pixel line between the tiles.

Tile Neatness The T ile Neatness slider alters the randomness, or indeed, the neat-
ness of the tile shapes. A setting of “0.0” renders perfectly shaped tiles, and a
higher setting will render increasingly more randomized tile shapes.

Light Direction Light Direction sets the direction from which the lighting color is ren-
dered onto the tiles. A setting of “0” will render the tiles with light approaching
from the left of the image. “180” will render the light as if coming from the right.
“90” is directly above the image window.

Color Variation Color Variation changes the amount of color that the renderer will alter
for the tiles. That is, this setting when set low, will respect the image coloring, and
when set high, will alter the colors for each tile.

13.100 Newsprint
Our apologies
Sorry, but the help page for this item is not written yet. Can I help?
Yes you can! Please send a message to [email protected] with newsprint as the
subject line. Feel free to also include documentation related suggestions or fix requests.

13.101 NL Filter
Our apologies
Sorry, but the help page for this item is not written yet. Can I help?
Yes you can! Please send a message to [email protected] with NL Filter as the
subject line. Feel free to also include documentation related suggestions or fix requests.

13.102 Noisify
Overview
This filter adds RGB noise to the image area. Noisify Options
Noisify Settings

Independent This checkbox will toggle the forcing of the three color sliders to be moved
individually or together. If this option is set the rendered noise will be white.

Red / Green / Blue The three color sliders will increase or decrease the amount of the
specified color in the noise render. If the Independent checkbox is not checked,
the noise will contain elements of each color individually.
CHAPTER 13. FILTERS 145

See also
Further discussion of noise can be found in the glossary under the Noise entry.

13.103 Not yet written

Our apologies
Sorry, but the help page for this item is not written yet. Can I help?
Yes you can! Please send a message to [email protected] With the name of the filter
that produced this message. Feel free to also include documentation related sugges-
tions or fix requests.

13.104 Normalize
Overview
This filter performs contrast stretching while constraining all color channels to the ex-
isting grouped pattern. When this plugin is used, all color channels will not be stretched
independently. See also
This filter performs a very similar function to the Contrast Autostretch Filter while
keeping colors normalized. This is more often what users require from contrast stretch-
ing to normalize color balance while maintaining white and black intensity.

13.105 Super Nova

Our apologies
Sorry, but the help page for this item is not written yet. Can I help?
Yes you can! Please send a message to [email protected] with nova as the subject
line. Feel free to also include documentation related suggestions or fix requests.

13.106 Oilify
Overview
This filter renders the image in a similar method to basic oil painting. Oilify Options
Oilify Settings
Use Intensity Algorithm Use Intensity Algorithm changes the mode of operation to
help preserve detail and coloring.

Mask Size Mask Size selects the size of the brush mask used to paint the oily render.
Larger values here produce an oilier render.

13.107 Pagecurl
Our apologies
Sorry, but the help page for this item is not written yet. Can I help?
Yes you can! Please send a message to [email protected] with pagecurl as the
subject line. Feel free to also include documentation related suggestions or fix requests.
CHAPTER 13. FILTERS 146

13.108 Papertile
Our apologies
Sorry, but the help page for this item is not written yet. Can I help?
Yes you can! Please send a message to [email protected] with papertile as the
subject line. Feel free to also include documentation related suggestions or fix requests.

13.109 PAT
Overview
The PAT file format is used for GIMP patterns. When you save a pattern file, you will
be prompted to give a description. This is not the filename, but an internal description
which gets displayed at the top of the Patterns Selection dialog when loaded. PAT
Information
To create a pattern to be used by The GIMP from thePattern Selection dialog, you
must save it in the your /patterns directory inside your personal GIMP directory –
normally ˜/.gimp-1.2. Make sure you press Refresh in the Pattern Selection dialog
to rescan the patterns directory. See also
For information on using patterns in T HE GIMP, see the Pattern Selection dialog
help page or the Bucket Fill tool help page.

13.110 Perlotine
Our apologies
Sorry, but the help page for this item is not written yet. Can I help?
Yes you can! Please send a message to [email protected] with perlotine as the
subject line. Feel free to also include documentation related suggestions or fix requests.

13.111 Pixelize
Overview
The Pixelize filter renders the image using large color blocks. It is very similar to
the effect seen on television when obscuring a criminal during trial. Pixelize Options
The single option available when using Pixelize is used to interactively change the
resulting block size. The number chosen will represent the size both horizontally and
vertically of the rendered blocks. The color for each block is determined at render time
by color weighting the underlying pixels, and determining the most used color.

13.112 Pixelmap
Our apologies
Sorry, but the help page for this item is not written yet. Can I help?
Yes you can! Please send a message to [email protected] with pixelmap as the
subject line. Feel free to also include documentation related suggestions or fix requests.
CHAPTER 13. FILTERS 147

13.113 Plasma
Overview
The Plasma Renderer plugin is a natural cloud generator. The results of a plasma
render, can be both pleasing, and useful for all digital artists. The cloud is rendered
using two configurable settings. Plasma Cloud Options
Plasma Cloud Settings

Random Seed Random Seed gives control over the apparent randomness of the cloud.
If the Time button is clicked, the random seed is generated using the system time
as the base for the randomization algorithm. This method yields particularly good
results, and is the preferred way of generating random clouds. The Number Entry
box can be utilized to reapply a particular random seed to the cloud.

Turbulence T urbulence allows control over the aggressiveness of the cloud. A lower
setting renders a softer, more pastel like cloud, where as a higher T urbulence
setting ensures a more detailed, and aggressive cloud structure.
 

Clicking OK, will render the cloud destructively into the current layer. This
will erase the layer data.
 
 

The cloud is computed as a square, thus rendering a plasma cloud onto a

non-square layer will stretch the cloud.

 

13.114 PNG
Overview
Allows you to configure settings for saving a PNG file. All applications which can
handle PNG files should be able to read any PNG saved from GIMP. However you can
make decisions here about which information about your image should be preserved in
the file, and how hard GIMP should try to keep the file size small. PNG File Options
PNG File Settings

Interlacing (Adam7) The Adam7 interlacing option stores image data in an order
which allows browsers or viewers to show progressively more detail as they load
the file, at the cost of increased file size.

Save background color This adds a bKGD chunk to your PNG file which advises
viewer software to choose a background color like your currently selected GIMP
background color. Adding this chunk increases file size slightly. Netscape N AV-
IGATOR will not display a png transparently if the file has been saved with this
option. It will instead use the chosen background color behind the image.
CHAPTER 13. FILTERS 148

Save gamma This adds a gAMA chunk to your PNG file which reflects the current
Gamma factor for your display (set globally for GIMP). Viewers with a different
display can compensate to ensure the image doesn’t look too dark or too bright.
Adding this chunk increases file size slightly.

Save layer offset If you are saving a single layer which has been shifted (offset) from
the top-left of the image, this will add a oFFs chunk to your PNG file to preserve
this offset factor in other viewers. Adding this chunk if it’s needed increases file
size slightly.

Save resolution This adds a pHYs chunk to your PNG which records the physical
resolution of the image. This is needed by GIMP and other viewers for printing or
actual size previews. Adding this chunk increases file size slightly.

Save creation time This adds a tIME chunk to your PNG which records the exact
date and time when the image was last saved. This will be preserved and can be
viewed in other applications. Adding this chunk increases file size slightly.

Compression This controls the amount of compression used to reduce the file size.
Larger numbers will usually reduce file size but will make saving slower. The
default (6) is often an acceptable compromise, but see below.

13.115 PNM
Overview
Allows you to configure settings for saving a PNM (Portable aNy Map) image. PNM
File Information
PNM isn’t actually a format in itself, but encompasses PBM (Portable BitMap) for
monochrome images, PGM (Portable Grayscale Map) for grayscale images and PPM
(Portable PixMap) for color images.
The only configurable parameter for PNM images is the way that data is formatted
either in ASCII (American Standard Code for Information Interchange) or raw (plain
bytes). The raw format will produce significantly smaller filesizes and is faster to read
and write.

13.116 Polarize
Our apologies
Sorry, but the help page for this item is not written yet. Can I help?
Yes you can! Please send a message to [email protected] with polar as the subject
line. Feel free to also include documentation related suggestions or fix requests.

13.117 Prepare for GIF

Our apologies
Sorry, but the help page for this item is not written yet. Can I help?
Yes you can! Please send a message to [email protected] with prep4gif as the
subject line. Feel free to also include documentation related suggestions or fix requests.
CHAPTER 13. FILTERS 149

13.118 The Print Plug-In

The Main Print Dialog

CHAPTER 13. FILTERS 150

The main window is divided into five panes:

Preview The Preview pane contains a positioning widget that allows interactive po-
sitioning of the output on the page. It contains an outer border, representing the
sheet of paper; an inner border, representing the printable area of the printer; an
arrow, pointing to the top of the page (the end that is fed into the printer); and a
black rectangle, representing the position of the image on the page. The image
can be moved around on the paper. When the left left mousebutton is used, the
image is moved in screen pixels; when any other button is used, the image is
moved in points1 . The arrow resizes depending upon the media size chosen; the
shaft of the arrow is always equal to one inch on the output.

Printer Settings The Printer Settings pane contains a dropdown menu for selecting a
printer. There is a special “printer” named File that allows you to choose a file to
print to, rather than a printer queue. The Setup box to the right allows specification
of a printer type, a PPD file2 , and the command to be used to print. Each distinct
printer in the Printer list can have different settings applied to it. Below that is a
combo box allowing choice of media size. The choices are constrained to those
that the printer supports. Below that are dropdown menus for choosing media
type (what kind of paper), media source (what input tray), ink type, and resolution.
All of these settings are printer-specific.

The Printer Setup Dialog

Position The Position pane contains various widgets to place the image on the paper.
These widgets work in conjunction with the Preview pane. At the top left of the
pane is a button to center the image on the paper (not on the printable area).
1
the output resolution of the plug-in
2
for Postscript printers
CHAPTER 13. FILTERS 151

To its right is a button group that allows choosing English (inch) units or metric
(centimeter) units. Below these are four boxes that allow entry of the left, top,
right, and bottom of the image. These positions are relative to the top left of the
paper3 . There are two additional boxes that allow specification of the right margin
and bottom margin if you prefer; these are relative to the bottom right corner of
the paper. Any of these may have values entered into them. The preview image
will be moved appropriately.
 

These entries do not resize the image.

 

Finally, there is a pick box for orientation (landscape or portrait). There is an

Auto mode that picks the orientation that best matches that of the image to be
printed.

Scaling The Scaling pane contains a slider that allows scaling of the image. The
image can be scaled in either percent of the printable area (NOT the page in this
case) or pixels per inch ( PPI) via a radio button below the slider. PPI allows
matching image resolution to printer resolution. The image may be scaled using
either method to between 5 and 100% of the imageable area. It is not possible to
crop with the Print plugin. In Percent mode, the image is scaled so that neither
axis will be longer than the percent of the printable area specified. For example, if
you print an image at 20%, it will be possible to tile the image 5 times on one axis
and at least 5 times on the other. To the right of the radio button is a button called
Set Image Scale. This sets the scaling to PPI, and sets the resolution as closely
as possible to the resolution stored in the image. To the right of the Set Image
Scale button are two boxes that allow entry of width and height of the image.
These set the scaling mode to PPI. Specifying one automatically sets the other,
and the image is repositioned as needed to prevent it from falling off the edge of
the page.

Image Settings The Image Settings pane allows choice of Line Art, Solid Colors,
Photograph, or Monochrome image type. Line art or Solid Colors should be
used for graphics containing mostly solid areas of color. They’re very similar to
each other. Photograph mode dithers more slowly, but produces more accurate
colors. Finally, Monochrome mode can be used to print absolute black and white
very quickly. To the right of these four radio buttons is a button called Adjust
Color. This pops up a new window that controls various output quality settings.
That will be described separately. Finally, there is a choice of Black and White
and Color output.

Action Buttons The last pane contains four action buttons:

• Print and Save Settings – immediately print the image (or, if the File printer
is chosen, display a file selection window to pick the output file), and save
all current settings for all printers.
3
again, that’s relative to the paper corner, not the printable area, which is usually smaller
CHAPTER 13. FILTERS 152

• Save Settings – immediately save the settings, and continue working in the
Print plugin.
• Print – immediately print the image (or, if the File printer is chosen, display
a file selection window to pick the output file), but do not save settings.
• Cancel – immediately quits without saving or printing.

Adjust Color
The Adjust Color button pops up a non-modal dialog that allows adjustment of
various parameters related to the print quality. These are independent of the controls
within the GIMP itself and only affect the print.
The Printer Color Settings Dialog

At the top of the window is a thumbnail of the image that changes to reflect the color
CHAPTER 13. FILTERS 153

settings of the image. This enables you to get an idea of how the image will print out as
you adjust settings.
Below that there are eight sliders:

Brightness (0-2.0, default 1.0) adjust the brightness of the image.

Contrast (0-4.0, default 1.0) adjust the output contrast.

Cyan, Magenta, Yellow (0-4.0, default 1.0) adjust the cyan, magenta, and yellow in
the output. These should not normally need to be adjusted very much; even very
small adjustments can go quite a long way to restoring color balance..

Saturation (0-9.0, default 1.0) adjust the color brilliance (saturation) of the output.
Saturation of 0 means pure gray scale, with no color. Saturation of 9.0 will make
just about anything but pure grays brilliantly colored.

Density (0.1-2.0, default 1.0) adjust the density (amount of ink) in the print. The den-
sity is automatically corrected for the particular printer, resolution, and, in some
cases, paper choices. If solid black in the input is not solid in the print, the density
needs to be increased; if there is excessive ink bleed-through and muddy dark
colors, the density should be decreased.
 

The density will not increase beyond a certain amount no matter what
the slider is set to.
 

Gamma (0.1-4.0, default 1.0) adjust the output gamma. The gamma value is auto-
matically corrected for the choice of printer; this is used if you believe the auto-
matic setting is incorrect.

Dither Algorithm There is also a selection box for the dither algorithm to be used.
There are currently seven choices:

• Adaptive Hybrid usually yields the best output quality. It chooses a modi-
fied Floyd-Steinberg error diffusion algorithm or ordered dithering depend-
ing upon the image characteristics.
• Ordered uses a pure ordered dither. It generally yields excellent quality for
simple black and white or four color printers without variable drop size or
drop modulation. It is not recommended if high quality is desired on six
color printers. It is considerably faster than Adaptive Hybrid.
• F ast also uses a pure ordered dither, but uses a very simple black model
and makes no attempt to handle multi-level (6-color, variable drop size, or
drop modulation) at all cleanly. It is substantially faster than Ordered dither.
The quality tends to be quite poor except on simple four color printers. On
three color printers, quality is probably competitive with anything else.
• V ery Fast is similar to F ast, except that it uses a very simple dither matrix
that can be looked up much more quickly than the matrix used in the F ast
dither. For simple pure black and white images dominated by horizontal
CHAPTER 13. FILTERS 154

and vertical lines, this may actually yield the best results. For other types of
images, the quality will be poor.
• Adaptive Random is similar to Adaptive Hybrid, except that the modifications
to the Floyd-Steinberg algorithm are slightly different. This is slower than
Adaptive Hybrid on most systems. For some images the quality may be
better, but generally Adaptive Hybrid should yield slightly superior images.
• Hybrid Floyd-Steinberg uses the modified Floyd-Steinberg algorithm of Adaptive
Hybrid on the entire image. Generally, the results are poor in pale regions.
• Random Floyd-Steinberg uses the modified Floyd-Steinberg algorithm of
Adaptive Random on the entire image. Generally, the results are poor in
pale regions.

13.119 PSP
Overview
GIMP can read images in the PSP format. PSP (Paint Shop Pro) images are
created by the Windows graphics program Jasc PAINT S HOP P RO. The format supports
advanced features such as layers and channels. PAINT S HOP P RO 6 also includes
vector layers, however, GIMP cannot read these files.

13.120 Qbist
Overview
This plug-in renders essentially randomly mixed colors in a potentially impressive
display of algorithmic disco.
To be more precise, it provides nine sets of equations which alter the image appear-
ance drastically. The resulting effect is a specific mesh of colors, arranged in varying
ways, according to the output of the given equation. Generally, this is some number of
gradient blends, intermingling to create new gradients and shapes. Qbist Options
In the Qbistdialog, nine preview boxes are displayed. The preview in the center is
the active one. That is, without further input, the preview displayed in the center will be
rendered into the image. Each of the previews are image buttons. Selecting any preview
enacts a corresponding equation. The selected equation is applied to the active preview
and changes all 9 previews to reflect a new set of input parameters. When a desirable
effect results, pressing the OK button applies the center preview to the current image.
Cancel will close the dialog without making any changes to the original image.
 
The generated images do not relate in any significant way to the original
image content. The same equations will not always correspond to the
same preview button. Qbist is, effectively, a randomizer.
 
This filter includes a Load and Save function for presets. Because the generated
images and equations do not rely on the original image content, there is no exact way
to guarantee an absolute reproduction of any set of effects. Therefore, as an alternate,
the user may save at least the current, center preview parameters.
CHAPTER 13. FILTERS 155

 
Qbist works best by repeatedly clicking any of the various preview buttons
until a desirable effect is observed. Being run largely on random outputs
based on random inputs, it tends to be not so useful if the user advances
with some strategy. It seems better to simply request new renders repeat-
edly until the user sees something attractive.
 

13.121 Random Blends

Overview
Random Blends is a filter that renders random gradients onto the active layer, and
applies a difference to them. To quote the author, “You’re bound to come up with some-
thing cool eventually.”

13.122 Randomize (Hurl, Pick, Slur)

Overview
These three filters ( Hurl, Pick, and Slur) are based upon a similar algorithm. Hurl
will create noise using RGB colors. Pick creates noise based on neighboring pixels.
Slur generates a crude melting effect. Randomize Options
As each of the three modes for this plugin share the same interface, only one de-
scription will be provided for this filter. Randomize Settings

Parameter Settings There are three available settings for this filter.

• Random Seed: The user may choose to utilize the system time as a seed
for the randomization routine. T ime is the safest option to choose for a more
random effect. If a number is selected, the same random seed may be used
across many executions of Randomization to produce similar results.
• Randomization (%): This setting dictates the percentage of pixels that will
be considered for randomization. Higher values here should result in more
intense noise.
• Repeat: This option sets the number of times that the filter will be run. This
option is of particular interest to those users running Slur.

13.123 Rotate Color Map

Overview
The Color Map Rotation filter is used to select a range of colors and replace them
with a differing range of colors both of which are specified by the user.
The main window shows a preview of both the Original and the Rotated images.
Primary controls are found on the Main tab. These are used to select the range of
colors for both the Original and Rotated images. This is achieved by utilizing color
wheels.
Also contained within the main window is the Misc tab. This tab contains various
options that further control the Color Map Rotation tool. Main Tab
CHAPTER 13. FILTERS 156

As discussed previously, the Main tab provides tools for the selection of color
ranges. The top half of the tab is dedicated to the selection of colors to alter. Con-
versely the lower half of the tab is where color ranges are selected that will be used to
replace the range selected above. From

Overview The upper half of the Main tab contains a color wheel, selection manipula-
tion buttons, and manual angle selection entry fields.

Color Wheel The Color Wheel is used to select the color range that will be selected
for transformation. The current selection is displayed using an angle indicator.
The angle can be adjusted by clicking and holding Button1, then dragging in the
desired direction. Clicking in an area between the arrows and moving will alter
the entire color area. Clicking and dragging the arrows themselves will alter the
angle.

Switch to clockwise The Switch to clockwise button reverses the direction of the map
angle. Upon clicking Switch to clockwise the button will change to Switch to
c/clockwise.

Change order of arrows This option inverts the arrow direction.

Select all The Select all button changes the selection to include all colors.

From / To The From and To entry boxes allow manual selection of the selection angle.
The units displayed here can be changed on the Misc tab.

To

Overview The To section behaves in the same manner as the From section except
that the color range selected affects the destination color map.

Misc Tab
Gray

Color Wheel This color wheel is used for selection of a color used to replace grey tones
on an image. Any color value here will affect the final color map. Using the Hue
and Saturation entry boxes will allow manual entry.

Mode There are two options:

• Treat as this: Selecting Treat as this will change the color map such that
any operation will be conducted against this color.
• Change to this: This option changes the color map such that the adjusted
color map uses this color as its base selection color.

What is Gray? This entry box increases the amount of gray in the color wheel. In-
creasing the value here will dynamically display an adjusted gray ring within the
color wheel.

Preview

• Continuous update: This toggle button switches the dynamic preview on or off.
When Continuous update is toggle “on”, the preview will update with any
change made to the settings.
CHAPTER 13. FILTERS 157

• Area: The three options here alter what is shown in the preview area.
– Entire Image: This option will display the entire image in the preview
area.
– Selection: This option will display zoom the preview area such that any
currently selected areas will fill the preview area.
– Context:

Units

The units of measurement can be selected here.

13.124 Repeat and Duplicate

Overview
The Repeat and Duplicate tool takes the current selection and copies it to the
current layer a specified number of times in a specified direction. Repeat and Duplicate
Options
Repeat and Duplicate

Repeats The Repeats input box specifies the number of times that the contents of the
selection should be pasted into the active layer.

Xoffset Xoffset sets the horizontal positioning in pixels of the copied contents. Nega-
tive values copy the selection contents to the left.

Yoffset Yoffset sets the vertical positioning in pixels of the copied contents. Negative
values copy the selection contents above the original selection.

13.125 Resynthesize
Our apologies
Sorry, but the help page for this item is not written yet. Can I help?
Yes you can! Please send a message to [email protected] with resynth as the
subject line. Feel free to also include documentation related suggestions or fix requests.

13.126 Ripple
Overview
The “Ripple” Filter allows the distortion of an image to look like a disturbed water
surface. Ripple Options
Ripple Settings

Options Checking the Antialiasing box renders jagged lines at the edge of the ripples
smooth without blurring the image.
The Retain Tileability ensures that where an image is tileable, such as a pattern,
the final distorted image will also be tileable. copies of the image can be placed
side by side to create a continuous image without any break.
CHAPTER 13. FILTERS 158

Orientation Defines which way the ripples occur. Either horizontal or vertical.

Edges When applying a ripple effect, the tool performs the distortion within the con-
fines of the selection so there will be small areas at one edge of the selection
which are missing.
Selecting Black fills in these area with solid black, Smear will fill this area with
pixels stretched to fill, and Wrap fills the blank area with the pixels that were lost
from the other side of the image.

Wave Type The wave type defines how the curve of the wave is calculated. Sawtooth
renders a sharper wave. Sine renders a softer wave.

Parameter Settings Setting the Period controls how long the waves are or the dis-
tance between two crests. Amplitude defines how high the wave is or the vertical
distance between the mean and a crest.

13.127 Rotate
Overview
The Rotate tool rotates the active layer or image the specified number of degrees.
See also
For further rotation options, see the help page for the Transform Tool.

13.128 Round Selection

Overview
The Round Selection tool rounds the corners of the active selection area.
This tool has no effect on circular selections. Round Selection Options
Round Selection Settings

Roundness This setting controls the amount of rounding that will be performed on the
selection. Higher values will render the selection with more roundedness.

See also
This filter is most commonly used in conjunction with the Rectangular Selection tool.

13.129 Sample Colorize

Overview
The Sample Colorize filter is another intelligent colorization tool available in T HE
GIMP. By working on the active image, and colorizing it using the color map of another
image, interesting colorization can result.
This filter allows images to be colorized using the color maps of other images, or the
currently selected gradient. Sample Colorize Options
Sample Colorize Settings
CHAPTER 13. FILTERS 159

Destination The Destination settings affect the active, or working image. The Des-
tination dropdown includes any open images that can be used as a destination
image for the color transformation. All of the color replacements can be affected
by the In Level slider.

Sample The Sample settings affect the method by which the sample colors are cho-
sen. The sample colors can be derived from either an image or a gradient, which
is accessible from the Sample dropdown. The color slider underneath the image
window changes the color spectrum that will be applied to the Destination image.
If an image is the desired Sample, the Get Sample Colors button will retrieve the
selection of colors that will be used.

13.130 Scatter HSV

Overview
Scatter HSV is a tool for creating noise which is defined at a set level in each of the
HSV (Hue Saturation Value) image components. Scatter HSV Options
Scatter HSV Settings

Hue The Hue slider changes the color of pixels in a random pattern. At a low setting,
the color change will be small. At a higher level, the available colors for the
scattering become progressively available around the color wheel until all colors
are possible.

Saturation The Saturation slider randomly increases the saturation (intensity) of the
scattered pixels.

Value The V alue slider alters the value (brightness) of the pixels.

13.131 Scratches
Our apologies
Sorry, but the help page for this item is not written yet. Can I help?
Yes you can! Please send a message to [email protected] with scratches as the
subject line. Feel free to also include documentation related suggestions or fix requests.

13.132 Selective Gaussian Blur

Overview
The Selective Gaussian Blur filter performs a mathematical region-based selection
of the image in small chunks, and determines the level of detail within that chunk. After
this it applies a Gaussian-based blur to it. Selective Gaussian Blur can be very proces-
sor intensive, but produces very controlled blurring. Selective Gaussian Blur Options
Selective Gaussian Blur Settings
CHAPTER 13. FILTERS 160

Blur Radius The Blur Radius setting affects the maximum number of pixels considered
for blurring. The higher the setting, the higher the number of pixels that will be in-
cluded in the region analysis. Be aware that a higher setting will take considerably
longer to compute.

Max Delta The Max Delta slider affects the level of detail that will be blurred. A higher
setting here will produce more smoothing of the pixels in the radius.

See also
A common use for the Selective Gaussian Blur filter is smoothing areas affected by
populations of JPEG artifacts, or bad pixelization distortions.
Further information regarding blurring can be found on the Gaussian Blur - RLE and
Gaussian Blur - IIR pages.

13.133 Selection to Path

Overview
This tool transforms a selection into a path. See also
Further information regarding paths can be found on the Paths dialog page.

13.134 Semi-Flatten
Overview
The Semi-flatten filter helps those in need of a solution to anti-aliasing indexed im-
ages with transparency.
In order to use this filter, the user must set the background color in the toolbox to the
color that will be used for the destination of the image. For example, a black circle that
will be saved as an indexed image for placement on a green web page would preclude
a need to set the background color to the same color green as the web page.
With the background color set, the filter can be started. The filter will scan the edges
of the selected layer and color them in a similar fashion to anti-aliasing, but using the
selected background color instead of transparency.

13.135 SGI
Overview
GIMP can both read and write to the SGI file format. This format, by Silicon Graph-
ics Inc., supports black and white (usually with the extension .bw), color ( .rgb), and
color images with an alpha channel ( .rgba). You may also find SGI files in any of the
above formats with the extension .sgi. SGI images are normally only found on SGI
workstations. SGI Options
When saving an SGI image, GIMP will prompt you to specify a compression type.
RLE (Run Length Encoded) compression is recommended because it is a lossless for-
mat. The Aggressive RLE option may produce a smaller file size, but SGI applications
may not open the image correctly.
CHAPTER 13. FILTERS 161

13.136 Sharpen
Overview
The “Sharpen” Filter attempts to focus images. The amount of sharpness can be
chosen. Higher values will lead to more sharpening.
This filter can be very useful for enhancing photos. Of note, however, is that the filter
will accentuate any noise or blemishes.

13.137 Shift
Overview
The “Shift” Filter displaces pixels a random amount in the specified direction. Either
horizontally or vertically. Shift Options
Shift Settings
Shift Amount The average amount of displacement can be set in pixels using the Shift
Amount slider.

13.138 Sinus
Our apologies
Sorry, but the help page for this item is not written yet. Can I help?
Yes you can! Please send a message to [email protected] with sinus as the subject
line. Feel free to also include documentation related suggestions or fix requests.

13.139 Smooth Palette

Overview
This plugin will create a new image that contains palette information derived from
the original image. It will attempt to create a smooth palette. That is, one that contains
a blend between colors. Smooth Palette Options
Smooth Palette Settings
Parameter Settings There are three available options to the user.

• W idth: Specifies the width in pixels of the derived palette.

• Height: Specifies the height in pixels of the derived palette.
• Search Time: Dictates how long the filter should spend matching colors to
derive a better, smoother palette.

13.140 Sobel
Our apologies
Sorry, but the help page for this item is not written yet. Can I help?
Yes you can! Please send a message to [email protected] with Sobel as the subject
line. Feel free to also include documentation related suggestions or fix requests.
CHAPTER 13. FILTERS 162

13.141 Solid Noise

Overview
The Solid Noise filter renders a greyscale noise layer. This layer has many useful
settings, that can be adjusted to suit varied applications. Solid Noise Settings
Solid Noise Settings

Random Seed The Random Seed input allows control over the random base number
that is used for the render. Time should be used for the most effective random
setting.

Detail Detail sets the level of aggressiveness for the noise that will be rendered. A
higher setting here will produce a more detailed render, a lower setting will pro-
duce a much softer one.

X/Y Size The X /Y Size sliders affect the size of the “blobs” in the final render. Higher
settings will cause the “blobs” to become smaller, where as a lower setting will
yield softer results.

Turbulent The Turbulent checkbox acts in a similar fashion to the Detail setting. Check-
ing this box will create a noise pattern with an increased chaotic nature. The
Tileable checkbox forces the render to maintain a symmetric noise pattern, which
allows the final rendering to be tiled.
 

Like many of the Render filters, the Solid Noise filter destroys the current
layer.
 

13.142 Sparkle
Our apologies
Sorry, but the help page for this item is not written yet. Can I help?
Yes you can! Please send a message to [email protected] with sparkle as the
subject line. Feel free to also include documentation related suggestions or fix requests.

13.143 Spread
Overview
The Spread filter moves pixels in a random direction by a user specified amount.
Spread Options
Spread Settings

Spread Amount The only available setting for this filter is the amount of spread to
apply to the pixels.

• Horizontal / Vertical: This sets the amount of spread across the named axis.
The axis can be locked by clicking the Chain icon.
CHAPTER 13. FILTERS 163

• The unit that defines the distance that pixels will be moved is set using the
dropdown list. By default it is set to Px or pixels.

13.144 Stampify
Overview
Stampify renders the current image as a postage stamp. The filter provides the
semi-circles around the edge that represent the torn perforation holes found in stamps.
Stampify Options
Stampify Settings

Paper and Hole colors The Paper, and Hole color settings can be accessed directly,
by clicking the color well, or by using the FG, and BG buttons to fetch the
currently selected colors from the Toolbox.

Diameter The Diameter setting configures the number of pixels that make up the di-
ameter of the holes.

Gap The Gap parameter sets the gap, in pixels, between the perforation holes.

Marg The Marg setting affects the gap between the rendered layer, and the perfora-
tions.

13.145 Apply Canvas

Our apologies
Sorry, but the help page for this item is not written yet. Can I help?
Yes you can! Please send a message to [email protected] with struc as the subject
line. Feel free to also include documentation related suggestions or fix requests.

13.146 Sunras
Overview
T HE GIMP can both read and write images in the Sunras (Sun Raster) format. The
format supports grayscale, indexed, and truecolor images. As the name suggests, the
Sunras format in mostly used by Sun applications.
When saving an image in the Sunras format, a prompt to choose a data formatting
type will be presented. Run Length Encoded ( RLE) is the default. It is recommended
because it compresses the file without losing any quality. Use the Standard format if
there is any uncertainty as to whether or not another application will support it.

13.147 Terral Text

Overview
The T erral Text filter renders bump mapped text to the current layer using either solid
noise or the current layer for coloring. It then creates a mask to hide the surrounding
CHAPTER 13. FILTERS 164

area in black, leaving the text string as the only immediately visible artifact. Terral Text
Options
Terral Text Settings

Solid noise Choosing Solid noise will render the text using soft solid noise shapes.
Choosing current picture, on the other hand, will render the bumpmap onto the
current layer.

Font name The F ont name button selects the font that will be rendered by the filter.
Choosing an appropriate font size is important. Too small, and the text string may
be unreadable, too large, and the string may take hours to render.

Text The T ext input box is where the text string that will be rendered can be input.

Blur amount Blur amount is a slider setting for the amount of blur to use prior to bump
mapping the text. A high setting here usually leads to more rounded text, but it
is best to test various settings based on the result required, the font, and the font
size.

13.148 TeX String

Overview
The T eX String filter renders a TeX string as a new floating layer. For more informa-
tion on TeX, visitthe Comprehensive TeX Archive Network. TeX String Options
TeX String Settings

Input File Input file is where the name of the TeX macro file should be inserted.

TeX string T ex string is where the actual TeX String should be input.

Dpi Dpi sets the rendering DPI level.

Magstep Magstep sets the TeX magstep.

Anti aliasing Anti aliasing controls the level of antialiasing that will be applied to the
string at render time.

13.149 TGA
Overview
The TGA format was developed by Truevision as a way of storing color images,
specifically 24 and 32-bit color images. The format is sometimes known incorrectly
as “Targa” which refers to the graphics hardware for which the format was originally
designed.
The TGA format is lossless (no image data is discarded during saving) and supports
high-color images.
The TGA format can be RLE (Run Length Encoding) compressed which results
in significantly smaller file sizes, but will give slower performance when handling the
image.
CHAPTER 13. FILTERS 165

13.150 Threshold Alpha

Our apologies
Sorry, but the help page for this item is not written yet. Can I help?
Yes you can! Please send a message to [email protected] with Threshold Alpha
as the subject line. Feel free to also include documentation related suggestions or fix
requests.

13.151 TIFF
Overview
Allows you to configure settings for saving a TIFF (Tagged Image File Format) im-
age. TIFF files can be compressed in a number of ways to reduce the file size. LZW
(Lempel Ziv Welch) compression is the same method used in GIF images, and pro-
duces a significant reduction in file size without losing any image information (it is a
lossless method). It should be noted that LZW compression is covered by a restrictive
Unisys license.
PackBits compression is often used on Macintosh systems and is a form of Run
Length Encoding ( RLE) which, like LZW, is a lossless method.
Deflate compression, sometime known as "zip" compression, uses another variant
of the LZW compression method and so gives similar results, but is not restricted by
any licenses. LZW compression should be used on logo-type images such as maps
and line diagrams. JPEG compression is the same compression methods used when
saving JPEG files. JPEG compression should be used on photographs or realistic
scenes.
Finally, you can leave the TIFF uncompressed for maximum quality, but be warned
that file sizes can be very large.
As with JPEG (and some other formats) a comment can be added to the image up
to 32KB. A default comment for new images can be set in Preferences.

13.152 Tile
Overview
“Tile” creates multiple copies of the current image in a tiled pattern. The size of
the tiled image should be set as a multiple of the current image to get a cleanly tiled
image. For example, setting 400 x 400 for a 100 x 100 image would make the new
image contain 4 copies of the current image.
 

It is often useful to select Create New Image so that the current image
remains unaltered.
 

13.153 Tileable Blur

Overview
CHAPTER 13. FILTERS 166

The T ileable Blur filter can be utilized to blur already tileable images so that the
tileable properties of the layer are not lost after blurring. Tileable Blur Options
Tileable Blur Settings

Radius The Radius slider sets the radius of the blur in the same fashion as the Gaus-
sian Blur IIR, or the Gaussian Blur RLE filters.

Blur Vertically This option sets the blur to work on the vertical axis.

Blur Horizontal This option sets the blur to work on the horizontal axis.

Blur Type This dropdown box sets the blur type to either IIR or RLE.

13.154 Small Tiles

Our apologies
Sorry, but the help page for this item is not written yet. Can I help?
Yes you can! Please send a message to [email protected] with tileit as the sub-
ject line. Feel free to also include documentation related suggestions or fix requests.

13.155 Make Seamless

Our apologies
Sorry, but the help page for this item is not written yet. Can I help?
Yes you can! Please send a message to [email protected] with tiler as the subject
line. Feel free to also include documentation related suggestions or fix requests.

13.156 Transparent Logo

Our apologies
Sorry, but the help page for this item is not written yet. Can I help?
Yes you can! Please send a message to [email protected] with translogo as the
subject line. Feel free to also include documentation related suggestions or fix requests.

13.157 Unsharp Mask

Our apologies
Sorry, but the help page for this item is not written yet. Can I help?
Yes you can! Please send a message to [email protected] with Unsharp as the
subject line. Feel free to also include documentation related suggestions or fix requests.
CHAPTER 13. FILTERS 167

13.158 URL
Overview
T HE GIMP can load an image directly from an HTTP or FTP server. The image can
be in any of the formats that T HE GIMP recognizes. To open the file, simply type the full
URL (Uniform Resource Locator) as the selection, e.g. http://www.gimp.org/wilber.jpg.
You can either specify the file type as URL or Automatic, and click OK. T HE GIMP will
display its progress as it downloads the image to a temporary directory.

13.159 Van Gogh (LIC)

Our apologies
Sorry, but the help page for this item is not written yet. Can I help?
Yes you can! Please send a message to [email protected] with Van Gogh (LIC)
as the subject line. Feel free to also include documentation related suggestions or fix
requests.

13.160 Video
Our apologies
Sorry, but the help page for this item is not written yet. Can I help?
Yes you can! Please send a message to [email protected] with video as the subject
line. Feel free to also include documentation related suggestions or fix requests.

13.161 Value Invert

Overview
The “Value Invert” plug-in inverts the Value (brightness) part of an HSV (Hue Satu-
ration Value) image. The Hue and Saturation of the image remain unaffected so color
will be the same, just a different shade. See also
For straight out color inversion, see the Invert help page.

13.162 Value Propagate

Our apologies
Sorry, but the help page for this item is not written yet. Can I help?
Yes you can! Please send a message to [email protected] with vpropagate as the
subject line. Feel free to also include documentation related suggestions or fix requests.

13.163 Warp Sharp

Our apologies
Sorry, but the help page for this item is not written yet. Can I help?
Yes you can! Please send a message to [email protected] with Warp-sharp as the
subject line. Feel free to also include documentation related suggestions or fix requests.
CHAPTER 13. FILTERS 168

13.164 Warp
Our apologies
Sorry, but the help page for this item is not written yet. Can I help?
Yes you can! Please send a message to [email protected] with warp as the subject
line. Feel free to also include documentation related suggestions or fix requests.

13.165 Waves
Our apologies
Sorry, but the help page for this item is not written yet. Can I help?
Yes you can! Please send a message to [email protected] with waves as the subject
line. Feel free to also include documentation related suggestions or fix requests.

13.166 Webify
Our apologies
Sorry, but the help page for this item is not written yet. Can I help?
Yes you can! Please send a message to [email protected] with webify as the sub-
ject line. Feel free to also include documentation related suggestions or fix requests.

13.167 Whirl Pinch

Our apologies
Sorry, but the help page for this item is not written yet. Can I help?
Yes you can! Please send a message to [email protected] with whirlpinch as the
subject line. Feel free to also include documentation related suggestions or fix requests.

13.168 Wind
Our apologies
Sorry, but the help page for this item is not written yet. Can I help?
Yes you can! Please send a message to [email protected] with wind as the subject
line. Feel free to also include documentation related suggestions or fix requests.

13.169 Windify
Our apologies
Sorry, but the help page for this item is not written yet. Can I help?
Yes you can! Please send a message to [email protected] with windify as the
subject line. Feel free to also include documentation related suggestions or fix requests.
CHAPTER 13. FILTERS 169

13.170 WMF
Overview
T HE GIMP can read files in the WMF (Windows Meta File) format. This format is
often used for stock images (clip-art) for office applications on the M ICROSOFT W IN -
DOWS platform. Although WMF is a vector format, GIMP rasterizes (converts to pixels)
the image when the file is loaded.

13.171 Xach Blocks

Our apologies
Sorry, but the help page for this item is not written yet. Can I help?
Yes you can! Please send a message to [email protected] with xachlego as the
subject line. Feel free to also include documentation related suggestions or fix requests.

13.172 Xach Shadows

Our apologies
Sorry, but the help page for this item is not written yet. Can I help?
Yes you can! Please send a message to [email protected] with xachshadow as the
subject line. Feel free to also include documentation related suggestions or fix requests.

13.173 Xachvision
Overview
The XachVision filter renders layers that produce an image that appears to be the
image one might see on a surveillance camera monitor. XachVision Options
XachVision Settings

Color Here the user may select the color that is used to render the screen scan lines.
Clicking the color box will produce a color selection dialog so that the color can
be set interactively. FG will set the color to the current foreground color. BG will
select the current background color.

Added Noise This slider will set the amount of extra noise that is added to the render.

13.174 XWD
Overview
T HE GIMP can read and write images in the XWD (X Window Dump) format. XWD
is the format or image which is output from the XWD program, which is included with
XFree86, for creating screenshots (which T HE GIMP itself uses on Unix platforms).
CHAPTER 13. FILTERS 170

13.175 Zealous Crop

Our apologies
Sorry, but the help page for this item is not written yet. Can I help?
Yes you can! Please send a message to [email protected] with Zealous Crop as
the subject line. Feel free to also include documentation related suggestions or fix
requests.

13.176 (GAP) Animation Filter

Our apologies
Sorry, but the help page for this item is not written yet. Can I help?
Yes you can! Please send a message to [email protected] with (GAP) Animation
Filter as the subject line. Feel free to also include documentation related suggestions
or fix requests.

13.177 (GAP) Video Frontends

Our apologies
Sorry, but the help page for this item is not written yet. Can I help?
Yes you can! Please send a message to [email protected] with gap_frontends
as the subject line. Feel free to also include documentation related suggestions or fix
requests.

13.178 (GAP) Video Navigator

Our apologies
Sorry, but the help page for this item is not written yet. Can I help?
Yes you can! Please send a message to [email protected] with gap_navigator_dialog
as the subject line. Feel free to also include documentation related suggestions or fix
requests.

13.179 (GAP) Video Plugins

Our apologies
Sorry, but the help page for this item is not written yet. Can I help?
Yes you can! Please send a message to [email protected] with gap_plugins as the
subject line. Feel free to also include documentation related suggestions or fix requests.
CHAPTER14

Keyboard Shortcuts

Keyboard shortcuts provide a fast way to access menu items in GIMP. These are the
default keyboard shortcuts - you can change them by highlighting a menu item (hovering
the cursor over it) and pressing the desired key combination. On some keyboards, the
"Alt" key may be called the "Meta" key.

171
CHAPTER 14. KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS 172

Toolbox Functions
Function Shortcut

Airbrush
A

Bezier Select B

Blend L

 

Bucket Fill
Shift
 B


Clone
C

Color Picker
O

Convolve V

 

Crop and Resize
Shift
 C


Default Colors D


Dodge and Burn
Shift
 D


Elliptical Select E

 

Eraser
Shift
 E



Flip
Shift
 F

Free Select
F

Fuzzy Select
Z

Ink
K

Intelligent Scissors I

 

Magnify
Shift
 M


Move
M

Paintbrush P


Pencil
Shift
 P


Rectangular Select R

 

Smudge
Shift
 S


Swap Colors
X

Text T

 

Transform Shift T



File Menu
Function Shortcut
  

Close Ctrl 
 W 

New Ctrl 
 N

Open Ctrl 
  O

Quit Ctrl Q

  
Save Ctrl  S

CHAPTER 14. KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS 173

Edit Menu
Function Shortcut
 

Clear Ctrl

  K


Copy Ctrl C

   

Copy Named
Ctrl 
  Shift
 C


Cut
Ctrl 
  X

 

Cut Named Ctrl

   Shift
 X


Fill with Foreground Color
Ctrl 
  ,

Fill with Background Color Ctrl 
  .

Paste Ctrl 
 V

  

Paste Named Ctrl

   Shift
 V


Redo
Ctrl 
  R

Undo Ctrl  Z

View Menu
Function Shortcut
 
 

Info Window Ctrl 

  Shift
 I



Navigation Window
Ctrl 
 Shift

 N

Shrink Wrap
Ctrl 
 E


 

Toggle Guides
Ctrl 
 Shift

 T



Toggle Rulers Ctrl

  Shift

 R

Toggle Selection
Ctrl 
 T


 

Toggle Statusbar
Ctrl 
 Shift S


Zoom In =


Zoom Out
-

Zoom to Actual Size (1:1) 1

Select Menu
Function Shortcut
 

Select All Ctrl A


 
 

Feather Selection
Ctrl
 Shift


 F



Float Selection
Ctrl
 Shift


 L

Invert Selection
Ctrl
 I



 

Select None
Ctrl
 Shift


 A



Sharpen Ctrl Shift
 H

Layers Menu
Function Shortcut
 

Anchor Layer
Ctrl 
 H


Merge Visible Layers Ctrl M

CHAPTER 14. KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS 174

Image Menu
Function Shortcut
 

Duplicate
Ctrl 
 D


 
Offset Ctrl
  Shift O

   
Grayscale Mode Alt 
 G


Indexed Mode Alt I

  
RGB Mode Alt  R

Dialogs Menu
Function Shortcut
 
 

Brushes
Ctrl 
 Shift

 B


Gradients
Ctrl 
 G


Layers, Channels& Paths Ctrl 
 L

Palette Ctrl P

   

Patterns Ctrl  Shift P



Filters Menu
Function Shortcut
 
 

Reshow Last Alt  Shift F

 
 
Repeat Last Alt  F


CHAPTER15

Command Line Options

15.1 GIMP
When you launch GIMP, it will often be from a graphical menu where you simply click
on the GIMP entry. This usually launches GIMP in its default form without any images
loaded. If you launch GIMP from a console, or edit the command used to launch it from
the menu, you can pass several options to it. These are in the format: gimpoptionsfiles
... GIMP Options

-h -help Displays a list of available options, and gives a terse description of each
one.

-v -version Prints the version number of the installed GIMP.

-b -batchcommands Runs GIMP in batch (non-interactive) mode. Any parameters

used as commands for-b will be passed to T HE GIMP to be interpreted by SCRIPT-
FG.

-g -gimprcgimprc Use an alternative gimprc ( GIMP settings file) instead of the

default which is usually located at ˜/gimp-1.2/gimprc. This is useful where
plug-in paths or machine specifications may be different.

-n -no-interface Run without a user interface.

-r -restore-session Attempt to restore a saved session. This will start GIMP with
the various dialogs as they were in the saved state.

-no-data Start GIMP without loading patterns, gradients, palettes and brushes. This
significantly reduces the start-up time, and is often useful when using GIMP in
non-interactive situations.

-verbose Prints startup messages to the console, showing all the settings files which
are parsed and the modules loaded. This is often useful in debugging situations.

-no-splash Do not show the splash screen. This significantly decreases the load
time, although you will not see the progress bar from the splash screen. This
automatically implies -verbose.

175
CHAPTER 15. COMMAND LINE OPTIONS 176

-no-splash-image Do not show the splash screen image as part of the splash screen.
Only shows text information in the splash screen. The progress indicator is still
visible. This decreases GIMP’s load time.

-no-shm Do not use shared memory between GIMP and its plug-ins. Instead of using
shared memory, GIMP will send data via pipe. This will result in slower perfor-
mance than using shared memory.

-no-xshm Do not use the X Shared Memory extension. If GIMP is being displayed
on a remote X server, this probably needs to be enabled. It is also useful for any
X server that doesn’t properly support the X shared memory extension. This will
result in slower performance than with X shared memory enabled.

-displaydisplay Use the specified X display.

-console-messages Do not pop-up dialog boxes on errors or warning, print them to

the console instead.

-debug-handlers Enable debug handlers which turns on the stack trace prompt for
all signals, not just fatal ones.

-system-gimprcgimprc Use an alternate system-wide gimprc file.

15.2 GIMP Tool

gimptool is a support script for GIMP which allows you to build and install scripts and
plug-ins, and can provide information to other programs about the libraries and paths
that GIMP was compiled with. The format is: gimptooloptions ... GIMP Tool
Options

-help Displays a list of available options, and gives a terse description of each one.

-version Prints the version number of the installed GIMP.

-quiet Runs without printing any of the build commands.

-n -dry-run Print commands, but don’t actually execute them. Useful for making
dry-runs for testing.

-bindir Prints the bindir used to install GIMP.

-sbindir Prints the sbindir used to install GIMP.

-libexecdir Prints the libexecdir used to install GIMP.

-datadir Prints the datadir used to install GIMP.

-sysconfdir Prints the sysconfdir used to install GIMP.

-sharedstatedir Prints the sharedstatedir used to install GIMP.

-localstatedir Prints the localstatedir used to install GIMP.

CHAPTER 15. COMMAND LINE OPTIONS 177

-libdir Prints the libdir used to install GIMP.

-infodir Prints the infodir used to install GIMP.

-mandir Prints the mandir used to install GIMP man (manual) pages.

-includedir Prints the includedir used to install GIMP.

-gimpdatadir Prints the actual directory where GIMP data files, such as patterns
and brushes, were installed.

-plugindir Prints the actual directory where GIMP plug-ins were installed.

-buildplug-in.c Compile and link plug-in.c into a GIMP plug-in.

-build-stripplug-in.c Compile, link and strip plug-in.c into a GIMP plug-in.

-installplug-in.c Compile, link and install plug-in.c into the users personal plug-in
directory - ˜/.gimp-1.2/plug-ins/.

-install-stripplug-in.c Compile, link, strip and install plug-in.c into the users
personal plug-in directory - ˜/.gimp-1.2/plug-ins.

-install-adminplug-in.c Compile, link, and install plug-in.c into the system-wide

plug-in directory - $PREFIX/lib/gimp/1.2/plug-ins.

-install-binplug-in Install a plug-in, which has already been compiled and linked,
into the users personal plug-in directory - ˜/.gimp-1.2/plug-ins.

-install-admin-binplug-in Install a plug-in, which has already been compiled

and linked, into the system-wide plug-in directory - $PREFIX/gimp/1.2/plug-ins.

-install-bin-stripplug-in Install a stripped plug-in, which has already been com-

piled and linked, into the users personal plug-in directory - ˜/.gimp-1.2/plug-ins.

-install-admin-bin-stripplug-in Install a stripped plug-in, which has already

been compiled and linked, into the system-wide plug-in directory - $PREFIX/lib/gimp/1.2/plug-ins.

-install-scriptscript.scm Install script.scm, into the users personal scripts di-

rectory - ˜/.gimp-1.2/scripts.

-install-admin-scriptscript.scm Install script.scm, into the system-wide scripts

directory - $PREFIX/share/gimp/scripts.

-uninstall-binplug-in Uninstall a plug-in from a users personal plug-in directory

- ˜/.gimp-1.2/plug-ins.

-uninstall-admin-binplug-in Uninstall a plug-in from the system-wide plug-in di-

rectory - $PREFIX/lib/gimp/1.2/plug-ins.

-uninstall-scriptscript.scm Uninstall a script from a users personal scripts di-

rectory - ˜/.gimp-1.2/scripts.

-uninstall-admin-scriptscript.scm Uninstall a script from the system-wide scripts

directory - $PREFIX/share/gimp/scripts.
CHAPTER 15. COMMAND LINE OPTIONS 178

-libs Print the linker flags that are necessary to link a GIMP plug-in.

-libs-noui Print the linker flags that are necessary to link a GIMP plug-in which
doesn’t require the GTK+ libraries.

-cflags Print the compiler flags that are necessary to link a GIMP plug-in.

-cflags-noui Print the compiler flags that are necessary to link a GIMP plug-in
which doesn’t require the GTK+ libraries.

-prefix=PREFIX If specified, use PREFIX instead of the installation prefix that GIMP
was built with when computing the output for the –cflags and –libs options. This
option is also used for the exec prefix if –exec-prefix was not specified. This option
must be specified before any –libs or –cflags options.

-exec-prefix=PREFIX If specified, use PREFIX instead of the installation exec prefix

that GIMP was built with when computing the output for the –cflags and –libs
options. This option must be specified before any –libs or –cflags options.

15.3 GIMP Remote

GIMP R EMOTE is another support program for GIMP. It allows you to open an image
from the command line in an already running GIMP. The format is: gimp-remoteoptions
...files ... GIMP Remote Options

-h -help Displays a list of available options, and gives a terse description of each
one.

-v -version Prints the version number of the installed GIMP.

-n -new Opens a new instance of GIMP if one is not already available.

CHAPTER16

GIMP License

GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE

Version 2, June 1991

Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc. 59

Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111 USA

Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of

this license document, but changing it is not allowed.

Preamble

The licenses for most software are designed to take away your
freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General
Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share
and change free software--to make sure the software is free for
all its users. This General Public License applies to most of
the Free Software Foundation’s software and to any other program
whose authors commit to using it. (Some other Free Software
Foundation software is covered by the GNU Library General Public
License instead.) You can apply it to your programs, too.

When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not

price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure
that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software
(and charge for this service if you wish), that you receive
source code or can get it if you want it, that you can change
the software or use pieces of it in new free programs; and that
you know you can do these things.

To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid

anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the
rights. These restrictions translate to certain
responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the
software, or if you modify it.

179
CHAPTER 16. GIMP LICENSE 180

For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether

gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights
that you have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or
can get the source code. And you must show them these terms so
they know their rights.

We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the

software, and (2) offer you this license which gives you legal
permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the software.

Also, for each author’s protection and ours, we want to make

certain that everyone understands that there is no warranty for
this free software. If the software is modified by someone else
and passed on, we want its recipients to know that what they
have is not the original, so that any problems introduced by
others will not reflect on the original authors’ reputations.

Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software

patents. We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a
free program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect
making the program proprietary. To prevent this, we have made
it clear that any patent must be licensed for everyone’s free
use or not licensed at all.

The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and

modification follow.

GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE

TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION

0. This License applies to any program or other work which

contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may
be distributed under the terms of this General Public License.
The "Program", below, refers to any such program or work, and a
"work based on the Program" means either the Program or any
derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a work
containing the Program or a portion of it, either verbatim or
with modifications and/or translated into another language.
(Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in the
term "modification".) Each licensee is addressed as "you".

Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are

not covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The
act of running the Program is not restricted, and the output
from the Program is covered only if its contents constitute a
work based on the Program (independent of having been made by
running the Program). Whether that is true depends on what the
CHAPTER 16. GIMP LICENSE 181

Program does.

1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program’s

source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you
conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an
appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep
intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the
absence of any warranty; and give any other recipients of the
Program a copy of this License along with the Program.

You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a

copy, and you may at your option offer warranty protection in
exchange for a fee.

2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any

portion of it, thus forming a work based on the Program, and
copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms
of Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all of these
conditions:

a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices

stating that you changed the files and the date of any change.

b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that
in whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or
any part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all
third parties under the terms of this License.

c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively

when run, you must cause it, when started running for such
interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an
announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a
notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you
provide a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program
under these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy
of this License. (Exception: if the Program itself is
interactive but does not normally print such an announcement,
your work based on the Program is not required to print an
announcement.)

These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If

identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the
Program, and can be reasonably considered independent and
separate works in themselves, then this License, and its terms,
do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as
separate works. But when you distribute the same sections as
part of a whole which is a work based on the Program, the
distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License,
CHAPTER 16. GIMP LICENSE 182

whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire

whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote
it.

Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or

contest your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the
intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of
derivative or collective works based on the Program.

In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the

Program with the Program (or with a work based on the Program)
on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring
the other work under the scope of this License.

3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on
it, under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the
terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of
the following:

a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable

source code, which must be distributed under the terms of
Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software
interchange; or,

b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three

years, to give any third party, for a charge no more than your
cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete
machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code, to be
distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a
medium customarily used for software interchange; or,

c) Accompany it with the information you received as to the

offer to distribute corresponding source code. (This
alternative is allowed only for non-commercial distribution and
only if you received the program in object code or executable
form with such an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.)

The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work
for making modifications to it. For an executable work,
complete source code means all the source code for all modules
it contains, plus any associated interface definition files,
plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of
the executable. However, as a special exception, the source
code distributed need not include anything that is normally
distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major
components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system
on which the executable runs, unless that component itself
accompanies the executable.
CHAPTER 16. GIMP LICENSE 183

If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering

access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent
access to copy the source code from the same place counts as
distribution of the source code, even though third parties are
not compelled to copy the source along with the object code.

4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the

Program except as expressly provided under this License. Any
attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the
Program is void, and will automatically terminate your rights
under this License. However, parties who have received copies,
or rights, from you under this License will not have their
licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full
compliance.

5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have
not signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to
modify or distribute the Program or its derivative works. These
actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License.
Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Program (or any work
based on the Program), you indicate your acceptance of this
License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying,
distributing or modifying the Program or works based on it.

6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on
the Program), the recipient automatically receives a license
from the original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the
Program subject to these terms and conditions. You may not
impose any further restrictions on the recipients’ exercise of
the rights granted herein. You are not responsible for
enforcing compliance by third parties to this License.

7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of

patent infringement or for any other reason (not limited to
patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court
order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of
this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this
License. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy
simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other
pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not
distribute the Program at all. For example, if a patent license
would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Program by
all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you,
then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License
would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Program.

If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable

CHAPTER 16. GIMP LICENSE 184

under any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is

intended to apply and the section as a whole is intended to
apply in other circumstances.

It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe

any patents or other property right claims or to contest
validity of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose
of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution
system, which is implemented by public license practices. Many
people have made generous contributions to the wide range of
software distributed through that system in reliance on
consistent application of that system; it is up to the
author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute
software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose
that choice.

This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is

believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License.

8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted

in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted
interfaces, the original copyright holder who places the Program
under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution
limitation excluding those countries, so that distribution is
permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded. In such
case, this License incorporates the limitation as if written in
the body of this License.

9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new

versions of the General Public License from time to time. Such
new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version,
but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns.

Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the

Program specifies a version number of this License which applies
to it and "any later version", you have the option of following
the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later
version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the
Program does not specify a version number of this License, you
may choose any version ever published by the Free Software
Foundation.

10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other

free programs whose distribution conditions are different, write
to the author to ask for permission. For software which is
copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free
Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our
decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free
CHAPTER 16. GIMP LICENSE 185

status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting

the sharing and reuse of software generally.

NO WARRANTY

11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO

WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE
LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT
HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE
QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE
PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY
SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.

12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO

IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY
MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE
LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL,
INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR
INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS
OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY
YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH
ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.

END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS

Appendix: How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs

If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the

greatest possible use to the public, the best way to achieve
this is to make it free software which everyone can redistribute
and change under these terms.

To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is

safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most
effectively convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file
should have at least the "copyright" line and a pointer to where
the full notice is found.<one line to give the program’s name and a brief idea of what
it does.> Copyright (C) 19yy<name of author>

This program is free software; you can redistribute it

and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public
License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
CHAPTER 16. GIMP LICENSE 186

This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,

but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
GNU General Public License for more details.

You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public

License along with this program; if not, write to the Free
Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston,
MA 02111 USA

Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and

paper mail.

If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice

like this when it starts in an interactive mode:

Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) 19yy name of author

Gnomovision comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details type
‘show w’. This is free software, and you are welcome to
redistribute it under certain conditions; type ‘show c’ for
details.

The hypothetical commands ‘show w’ and ‘show c’ should show the

appropriate parts of the General Public License. Of course, the
commands you use may be called something other than ‘show w’ and
‘show c’; they could even be mouse-clicks or menu
items--whatever suits your program.

You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer)
or your school, if any, to sign a "copyright disclaimer" for the
program, if necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names:

Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the

program ‘Gnomovision’ (which makes passes at compilers) written
by James Hacker.<signature of Ty Coon>, 1 April 1989
Ty Coon, President of Vice

This General Public License does not permit incorporating your

program into proprietary programs. If your program is a
subroutine library, you may consider it more useful to permit
linking proprietary applications with the library. If this is
what you want to do, use the GNU Library General Public License
instead of this License.
CHAPTER17

Glossary

A
Alpha Refers to transparency. An Alpha Channel allows transparency control. Certain
image formats may only contain a single Alpha Channel allowing a transparency
of on or off. Other formats allow a variable level of transparency.

Anti Aliasing A technique used to make diagonal or curved edges appear smoother by
setting pixels near the edge to intermediate colors according to where the edge
crosses the underlying color.

C
Channels Each image is divided up into separate channels and then recombined be-
fore being sent to the output device. An output device is most usually a screen.
The channels that are used when rendering images to a screen are Red, Green,
and Blue. Other output devices may use different channels. Channels can be
useful when working on images that need adjustment to one particular color. If,
for example, the removal of “red-eye” is the goal, work on the Red channel is most
obviously a ready solution. Channels can be seen as masks that allow or restrict
the output of the color that the channel represents. By running filters against this
channel information, many varied and subtle effects can be put in to play by the
experienced GIMP user.

Dithering Dithering refers to the math and voodoo involved in rendering an image that
has few colors seem like it has many. Dithering is accomplished in different
ways depending on the output device and the program. One particularly effec-
tive method is clustering pixels of color together in an attempt to simulate another
color. This is achieved by the human eye and the tendency for it to mix colors
while viewing complex color patterns. A common dithering effect is seen on tele-
vision screens or in newspaper print. From a distance the images seem to be
constructed of many varied colors or shades, but upon closer inspection this is
certainly not the case. A color television uses only three colors clustered together
in various states of on or off. A black and white newspaper uses only black ink,
yet pictures in newspapers appear to be constructed of grey tones. Furthermore,
there are techniques used to achieve greater success in dithering. T HE GIMP

187
CHAPTER 17. GLOSSARY 188

can utilize the Floyd-Steinberg dithering technique, for example. This dithering
method is simply put, a mathematical way of clustering the pixels to accomplish
better results than other dithering methods. Of course, there are always excep-
tions and there are many different dithering models that are in use today.

F
File Format A way that an image is written. You should select a file format which is
suitable for your situation. JPEG and PostScript are examples of file formats.

Filter

FITS The FITS, or Flexible Image Transport System, was developed by NASA for
cross platform transfer of astronomical data. Of note is that not all FITS files
contain image data. The format is also used to transport other data such as
tables and matrices.

G
GNU GNU’s Not Unix, an organization devoted to the creation and support of Open
Source software. GIMP is an official GNU application.

Guides Guides are a convenient way to help you align layers and tool functions on your
drawable image, layer, or selection. Guides are created manually by clicking and
dragging from either the top or left rulers in to the image area. They appear as
blue dashed lines. They do not print. There are some useful options available to
the user to help utilize guides efficiently, such as Snap to Guides, Toggle Guides,
and Center Guide.

H
Hex Triplet A way of representing color in the form #rrggbb where “rr” represents red,
“gg” green, and “bb” blue. Commonly used in web design.

HSB

HSL

HSV Hue Saturation Value, a way of representing color. The Hue is the color like red
or blue, the Saturation is how strong the color is and the Value is the brightness.
This is sometimes called HSB or Hue Saturation Brightness.

I
Incremental, paint mode This paint mode renders each brush stroke directly onto the
active layer. If incremental mode is not set, there is a canvas buffer that is com-
CHAPTER 17. GLOSSARY 189

posited with the active layer.

The two images above were created using a brush with spacing set to sixty. The
image on the left shows non-incremental painting and the image on the right
shows the difference that incremental painting can produce. Incremental paint
mode results in each brush application, through the duration of a stroke, being
rendered in addition to any previous brush renderings.

M
Marching Ants The name for the dotted line which delineates a selection.

Modes, layer There are fifteen available layer modes. Selecting a layer mode changes
the way that layer or paint application is viewed based on the layer or layers
beneath it. Layer modes

Normal This is the default layer mode. The layer will be viewed normally.
Dissolve The Dissolve layer mode dissolves the layer into the layer beneath
it. It does so by dispersing pixels. This can best be seen in a close-up

screenshot.
The image on the left illustrates a normal layer mode and the image on the
right shows the same two layers in dissolve mode.
Multiply This mode multiplies the pixel values of the layer with those that are

visible beneath it.

The image on the left illustrates a normal layer mode and the image on the
right shows the same two layers in multiply mode.
CHAPTER 17. GLOSSARY 190

Divide
The image on the left illustrates a normal layer mode and the image on the
right shows the same two layers in divide mode.

Screen
The image on the left illustrates a normal layer mode and the image on the
right shows the same two layers in screen mode.

Overlay
The image on the left illustrates a normal layer mode and the image on the
right shows the same two layers in overlay mode.

Difference
The image on the left illustrates a normal layer mode and the image on the
right shows the same two layers in difference mode.

Addition
The image on the left illustrates a normal layer mode and the image on the
right shows the same two layers in addition mode.

Subtract
CHAPTER 17. GLOSSARY 191

The image on the left illustrates a normal layer mode and the image on the
right shows the same two layers in subtract mode.

Darken Only
The image on the left illustrates a normal layer mode and the image on the
right shows the same two layers in darken mode.

Lighten Only
The image on the left illustrates a normal layer mode and the image on the
right shows the same two layers in lighten mode.

Hue
The image on the left illustrates a normal layer mode and the image on the
right shows the same two layers in hue mode.

Saturation
The image on the left illustrates a normal layer mode and the image on the
right shows the same two layers in saturation mode.

Color
The image on the left illustrates a normal layer mode and the image on the
right shows the same two layers in color mode.
CHAPTER 17. GLOSSARY 192

Value
The image on the left illustrates a normal layer mode and the image on the
right shows the same two layers in value mode.

N
Noise Noise refers to image noise. This is most commonly, a visual representation
of audial white noise. A common place that noise is found in visual format is
television sets that are not receiving signal. It is considered to be a random
collection of pixels of certain colors.

P
Parasite A piece of information which is included in a file such as the compression type
or a comment.

Perl A scripting language which can be used for GIMP plug-ins.

Plug-In Extensions to the standard GIMP feature set.

S
Sample Merge Sample Merging refers to the system of taking sampling information
from the sub-pixel layer of the image. Normally all pixel changes are based on a
lowest resolution of one pixel. Sub-pixel operations take the information from a
layer that has no lowest resolution. It is a mathematical level that uses vectors to
describe the operations.

Script-Fu A scripting language designed specifically for GIMP.

Stroke A function for making a selection, path or channel into a solid line using the
paintbrush.

Swap Directory An area on your hard disk which effectively extends the amount of
main memory available to GIMP meaning larger images or more complex opera-
tions can be performed.

T
Tile Cache A way that GIMP speeds up image display by keeping the data in memory.

Tool A mode for manipulating image functions.Paintbrush andClone are examples of

tools.
CHAPTER 17. GLOSSARY 193

X
XCF The native file format used by GIMP. XCF is an acronym for the eXperimental
Computing Facility which is located at the University of California at Berkeley
where T HE GIMP was originally written. The XCF file format supports the storage
of many GIMP features, such as Layers, Alpha, and Guides.
 Index

LUT operations, 25 Clone, 50

Close, 74
About, 14 Color Balance, 50
Add Alpha Channel, 35 Color Exchange, 105
Add Dust, 96 Color Palette, 89
Add Layer Mask, 34 Color Picker, 51
Adjust FG-BG, 97 Color Selector, 94, 95
Airbrush, 44 Color Transform Tools, 68
Alien Map, 98 Context Help, 14
Alien Map 2, 97 Convert to Grayscale, 23
Alpha Channel, 35 Convert to Indexed, 23
Alpha To Selection, 35 Convolver, 51
Anchor Layer, 32 Copy, 17, 18
Apply Canvas, 100 Copy Gradient, 88
Apply Layer Mask, 35 Copy Named, 18
Copy Path, 42
Bezier Selection, 45
Crop, 52
Blend, 45
Cubism, 107
Blinds, 101
Curves, 53
Blur, 101, 114
Cut, 17
Border Selection, 20
Cut Named, 18
Brightness-Contrast, 47
Brush Editor, 86 Delete Channel, 38
Brush Selection, 85 Delete Gradient, 88
Brushes, 86 Delete Layer, 32
Bucket Fill, 48 Delete Layer Mask, 35
Bug Submission, 5 Delete Palette, 91
Burst, 102 Delete Path, 42
By Color Selection, 49 Desaturate, 25
BZ2, 103 Device Status, 93
Devics, 93
Canvas operations, 25
Dialogs, 78
Channel to Selection, 37
Directories, 85
Channels, 36
Display Settings, 79
Channels Dialog, 36
Document Index, 93
Channels Introduction, 36
Dodge or Burn, 54
Checkerboard, 104
Dot for Dot, 21
Clear, 18
Duplicate, 27
Clipboards, 17

194
INDEX 195

Duplicate Channel, 37 Image Window, 15

Duplicate Layer, 32 Imagetype, 23
Duplicate Path, 41 Import Palette, 91
Import Path, 43
Edit Channel Attributes, 38 Indexed Palette, 92
Edit Layer Attributes, 35 Info Window, 21
Edit Path Attributes, 43 Ink, 60
Edit Qmask Attributes, 95 Input Devices, 93
Elliptical Selection, 55 Intelligent Scissors, 61
Environment Settings, 83 Interface Settings, 80
Equalize, 25 Invert, 25
Eraser, 56 Invert Selection, 19
Error Console, 94
Export Path, 43 Jigsaw, 127
JPEG, 128
Feather Selection, 20
File, 72, 93 Last Opened, 74
File Formats, 9 Layer Boundary Size, 32
Fill, 19 Layer Mask, 34, 35
Filters, 96 Layer Mask to Selection, 35
First Time, 7 Layer to Image Size, 33
Fit Text, 110 Layers, 28, 31
FITS, 110 Layers Dialog, 31
Flame, 111 Layers, Channels and Paths, 78
Flatten Image, 34 Levels, 61
Flip, 56 Lower Channel, 37
Float Selection, 19 Lower Layer, 32
Free-Hand Selection, 57
Fuzzy Selection, 58 Magnify, 62
Main interface, 8
Gfig, 115 Maze, 131
GIMP, 3 Measure, 63
GIMP Table Magic, 124 Merge Down, 34
Gradient Editor, 87 Merge Palette, 92
Gradient Map, 123 Merge Visible Layers, 33
Gradient Selection, 87 MIFF, 132
Grid, 123 Module Browser, 13
Grow Selection, 20 Monitor Settings, 84
GTK Color Selector, 94 Mosaic, 132
GZ, 125 Motion Blur, 131
Move, 63
Help, 14
Histogram, 59 Navigation Window, 21
HRZ, 126 New Channel, 37
Hue-Saturation, 59 New File Settings, 79
New Gradient, 88
IIR Blur, 114 New Image, 72
Image, 15 New Layer, 32
Image history, 16 New Palette, 92
INDEX 196

New Path, 41 Reshow Last Filter, 96

New View, 22 Resolution, 84
RGB, 23
Offset, 25 RLE Blur, 114
Oilify, 134 Rotation, 69
Open, 76
Open by Extension, 76 Save, 77
Open File, 73 Save as PovRay, 89
Operations with selections, 18 Save by Extension, 77
Save File, 73
Paint Tools, 68 Save to Channel, 20
Paintbrush, 63 Scale Image, 26
Palette, 90 Scale Layer, 33
Palette Editor, 90 Scale Layer Warning, 27
Paste, 17 Scaling, 70
Paste As New, 17 Select All, 19
Paste Into, 17 Select None, 19
Paste Named, 18 Selection, 35, 37, 41
Paste Path, 42 Selection operations, 19
PAT, 135 Selection Tools, 45
Path to Selection, 41 Session Management, 84
Paths, 39, 45 Set Canvas Size, 26
Paths Dialog, 39 Sharpen Selection, 20
Pattern Selection, 89 Shearing, 70
Patterns, 89 Shrink Selection, 20
Pencil, 65 Shrink Wrap, 23
Perspective, 71 Smudge, 67
Pixelize, 135 Snap to Guides, 22
Plasma, 136 Split Segments Uniformly, 89
Plug-Ins, 96 Stack, 32
PNG, 136 Standard GIMP Color Selector, 94
PNM, 137 Stroke, 19
Posterize, 66 Stroke Path, 41
Preferences Dialog, 78
Print, 138 Text Tool, 68
PSP, 143 Threshold, 68
Tip of the Day, 14
Qbist, 143 Toggle Guides, 22
Quit, 75 Toggle Rulers, 22
Toggle Selection, 22
Raise Channel, 37
Toggle Statusbar, 22
Raise Layer, 32
Tool Options, 44
Really Close, 75
ToolBox, 13
Really Quit, 75
Tools, 44
Rectangular Selection, 66
Transform Tools, 69
Redo, 16
Triangle Color Selector, 95
Rename Gradient, 89
Repeat Last Filter, 96 Undo, 16
Replicate Segment, 89
INDEX 197

Undo History, 94
Using Layers, 29

View operations, 21

Watercolor Color Selector, 95

What are Layers?, 28
Why GIMP, 4

Zoom, 21